OpenCores
URL https://opencores.org/ocsvn/openrisc/openrisc/trunk

Subversion Repositories openrisc

[/] [openrisc/] [trunk/] [gnu-stable/] [gcc-4.5.1/] [gcc/] [doc/] [md.texi] - Blame information for rev 861

Go to most recent revision | Details | Compare with Previous | View Log

Line No. Rev Author Line
1 284 jeremybenn
@c Copyright (C) 1988, 1989, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1996, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001,
2
@c 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
3
@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4
@c This is part of the GCC manual.
5
@c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
6
 
7
@ifset INTERNALS
8
@node Machine Desc
9
@chapter Machine Descriptions
10
@cindex machine descriptions
11
 
12
A machine description has two parts: a file of instruction patterns
13
(@file{.md} file) and a C header file of macro definitions.
14
 
15
The @file{.md} file for a target machine contains a pattern for each
16
instruction that the target machine supports (or at least each instruction
17
that is worth telling the compiler about).  It may also contain comments.
18
A semicolon causes the rest of the line to be a comment, unless the semicolon
19
is inside a quoted string.
20
 
21
See the next chapter for information on the C header file.
22
 
23
@menu
24
* Overview::            How the machine description is used.
25
* Patterns::            How to write instruction patterns.
26
* Example::             An explained example of a @code{define_insn} pattern.
27
* RTL Template::        The RTL template defines what insns match a pattern.
28
* Output Template::     The output template says how to make assembler code
29
                        from such an insn.
30
* Output Statement::    For more generality, write C code to output
31
                        the assembler code.
32
* Predicates::          Controlling what kinds of operands can be used
33
                        for an insn.
34
* Constraints::         Fine-tuning operand selection.
35
* Standard Names::      Names mark patterns to use for code generation.
36
* Pattern Ordering::    When the order of patterns makes a difference.
37
* Dependent Patterns::  Having one pattern may make you need another.
38
* Jump Patterns::       Special considerations for patterns for jump insns.
39
* Looping Patterns::    How to define patterns for special looping insns.
40
* Insn Canonicalizations::Canonicalization of Instructions
41
* Expander Definitions::Generating a sequence of several RTL insns
42
                        for a standard operation.
43
* Insn Splitting::      Splitting Instructions into Multiple Instructions.
44
* Including Patterns::  Including Patterns in Machine Descriptions.
45
* Peephole Definitions::Defining machine-specific peephole optimizations.
46
* Insn Attributes::     Specifying the value of attributes for generated insns.
47
* Conditional Execution::Generating @code{define_insn} patterns for
48
                         predication.
49
* Constant Definitions::Defining symbolic constants that can be used in the
50
                        md file.
51
* Iterators::           Using iterators to generate patterns from a template.
52
@end menu
53
 
54
@node Overview
55
@section Overview of How the Machine Description is Used
56
 
57
There are three main conversions that happen in the compiler:
58
 
59
@enumerate
60
 
61
@item
62
The front end reads the source code and builds a parse tree.
63
 
64
@item
65
The parse tree is used to generate an RTL insn list based on named
66
instruction patterns.
67
 
68
@item
69
The insn list is matched against the RTL templates to produce assembler
70
code.
71
 
72
@end enumerate
73
 
74
For the generate pass, only the names of the insns matter, from either a
75
named @code{define_insn} or a @code{define_expand}.  The compiler will
76
choose the pattern with the right name and apply the operands according
77
to the documentation later in this chapter, without regard for the RTL
78
template or operand constraints.  Note that the names the compiler looks
79
for are hard-coded in the compiler---it will ignore unnamed patterns and
80
patterns with names it doesn't know about, but if you don't provide a
81
named pattern it needs, it will abort.
82
 
83
If a @code{define_insn} is used, the template given is inserted into the
84
insn list.  If a @code{define_expand} is used, one of three things
85
happens, based on the condition logic.  The condition logic may manually
86
create new insns for the insn list, say via @code{emit_insn()}, and
87
invoke @code{DONE}.  For certain named patterns, it may invoke @code{FAIL} to tell the
88
compiler to use an alternate way of performing that task.  If it invokes
89
neither @code{DONE} nor @code{FAIL}, the template given in the pattern
90
is inserted, as if the @code{define_expand} were a @code{define_insn}.
91
 
92
Once the insn list is generated, various optimization passes convert,
93
replace, and rearrange the insns in the insn list.  This is where the
94
@code{define_split} and @code{define_peephole} patterns get used, for
95
example.
96
 
97
Finally, the insn list's RTL is matched up with the RTL templates in the
98
@code{define_insn} patterns, and those patterns are used to emit the
99
final assembly code.  For this purpose, each named @code{define_insn}
100
acts like it's unnamed, since the names are ignored.
101
 
102
@node Patterns
103
@section Everything about Instruction Patterns
104
@cindex patterns
105
@cindex instruction patterns
106
 
107
@findex define_insn
108
Each instruction pattern contains an incomplete RTL expression, with pieces
109
to be filled in later, operand constraints that restrict how the pieces can
110
be filled in, and an output pattern or C code to generate the assembler
111
output, all wrapped up in a @code{define_insn} expression.
112
 
113
A @code{define_insn} is an RTL expression containing four or five operands:
114
 
115
@enumerate
116
@item
117
An optional name.  The presence of a name indicate that this instruction
118
pattern can perform a certain standard job for the RTL-generation
119
pass of the compiler.  This pass knows certain names and will use
120
the instruction patterns with those names, if the names are defined
121
in the machine description.
122
 
123
The absence of a name is indicated by writing an empty string
124
where the name should go.  Nameless instruction patterns are never
125
used for generating RTL code, but they may permit several simpler insns
126
to be combined later on.
127
 
128
Names that are not thus known and used in RTL-generation have no
129
effect; they are equivalent to no name at all.
130
 
131
For the purpose of debugging the compiler, you may also specify a
132
name beginning with the @samp{*} character.  Such a name is used only
133
for identifying the instruction in RTL dumps; it is entirely equivalent
134
to having a nameless pattern for all other purposes.
135
 
136
@item
137
The @dfn{RTL template} (@pxref{RTL Template}) is a vector of incomplete
138
RTL expressions which show what the instruction should look like.  It is
139
incomplete because it may contain @code{match_operand},
140
@code{match_operator}, and @code{match_dup} expressions that stand for
141
operands of the instruction.
142
 
143
If the vector has only one element, that element is the template for the
144
instruction pattern.  If the vector has multiple elements, then the
145
instruction pattern is a @code{parallel} expression containing the
146
elements described.
147
 
148
@item
149
@cindex pattern conditions
150
@cindex conditions, in patterns
151
A condition.  This is a string which contains a C expression that is
152
the final test to decide whether an insn body matches this pattern.
153
 
154
@cindex named patterns and conditions
155
For a named pattern, the condition (if present) may not depend on
156
the data in the insn being matched, but only the target-machine-type
157
flags.  The compiler needs to test these conditions during
158
initialization in order to learn exactly which named instructions are
159
available in a particular run.
160
 
161
@findex operands
162
For nameless patterns, the condition is applied only when matching an
163
individual insn, and only after the insn has matched the pattern's
164
recognition template.  The insn's operands may be found in the vector
165
@code{operands}.  For an insn where the condition has once matched, it
166
can't be used to control register allocation, for example by excluding
167
certain hard registers or hard register combinations.
168
 
169
@item
170
The @dfn{output template}: a string that says how to output matching
171
insns as assembler code.  @samp{%} in this string specifies where
172
to substitute the value of an operand.  @xref{Output Template}.
173
 
174
When simple substitution isn't general enough, you can specify a piece
175
of C code to compute the output.  @xref{Output Statement}.
176
 
177
@item
178
Optionally, a vector containing the values of attributes for insns matching
179
this pattern.  @xref{Insn Attributes}.
180
@end enumerate
181
 
182
@node Example
183
@section Example of @code{define_insn}
184
@cindex @code{define_insn} example
185
 
186
Here is an actual example of an instruction pattern, for the 68000/68020.
187
 
188
@smallexample
189
(define_insn "tstsi"
190
  [(set (cc0)
191
        (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "rm"))]
192
  ""
193
  "*
194
@{
195
  if (TARGET_68020 || ! ADDRESS_REG_P (operands[0]))
196
    return \"tstl %0\";
197
  return \"cmpl #0,%0\";
198
@}")
199
@end smallexample
200
 
201
@noindent
202
This can also be written using braced strings:
203
 
204
@smallexample
205
(define_insn "tstsi"
206
  [(set (cc0)
207
        (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "rm"))]
208
  ""
209
@{
210
  if (TARGET_68020 || ! ADDRESS_REG_P (operands[0]))
211
    return "tstl %0";
212
  return "cmpl #0,%0";
213
@})
214
@end smallexample
215
 
216
This is an instruction that sets the condition codes based on the value of
217
a general operand.  It has no condition, so any insn whose RTL description
218
has the form shown may be handled according to this pattern.  The name
219
@samp{tstsi} means ``test a @code{SImode} value'' and tells the RTL generation
220
pass that, when it is necessary to test such a value, an insn to do so
221
can be constructed using this pattern.
222
 
223
The output control string is a piece of C code which chooses which
224
output template to return based on the kind of operand and the specific
225
type of CPU for which code is being generated.
226
 
227
@samp{"rm"} is an operand constraint.  Its meaning is explained below.
228
 
229
@node RTL Template
230
@section RTL Template
231
@cindex RTL insn template
232
@cindex generating insns
233
@cindex insns, generating
234
@cindex recognizing insns
235
@cindex insns, recognizing
236
 
237
The RTL template is used to define which insns match the particular pattern
238
and how to find their operands.  For named patterns, the RTL template also
239
says how to construct an insn from specified operands.
240
 
241
Construction involves substituting specified operands into a copy of the
242
template.  Matching involves determining the values that serve as the
243
operands in the insn being matched.  Both of these activities are
244
controlled by special expression types that direct matching and
245
substitution of the operands.
246
 
247
@table @code
248
@findex match_operand
249
@item (match_operand:@var{m} @var{n} @var{predicate} @var{constraint})
250
This expression is a placeholder for operand number @var{n} of
251
the insn.  When constructing an insn, operand number @var{n}
252
will be substituted at this point.  When matching an insn, whatever
253
appears at this position in the insn will be taken as operand
254
number @var{n}; but it must satisfy @var{predicate} or this instruction
255
pattern will not match at all.
256
 
257
Operand numbers must be chosen consecutively counting from zero in
258
each instruction pattern.  There may be only one @code{match_operand}
259
expression in the pattern for each operand number.  Usually operands
260
are numbered in the order of appearance in @code{match_operand}
261
expressions.  In the case of a @code{define_expand}, any operand numbers
262
used only in @code{match_dup} expressions have higher values than all
263
other operand numbers.
264
 
265
@var{predicate} is a string that is the name of a function that
266
accepts two arguments, an expression and a machine mode.
267
@xref{Predicates}.  During matching, the function will be called with
268
the putative operand as the expression and @var{m} as the mode
269
argument (if @var{m} is not specified, @code{VOIDmode} will be used,
270
which normally causes @var{predicate} to accept any mode).  If it
271
returns zero, this instruction pattern fails to match.
272
@var{predicate} may be an empty string; then it means no test is to be
273
done on the operand, so anything which occurs in this position is
274
valid.
275
 
276
Most of the time, @var{predicate} will reject modes other than @var{m}---but
277
not always.  For example, the predicate @code{address_operand} uses
278
@var{m} as the mode of memory ref that the address should be valid for.
279
Many predicates accept @code{const_int} nodes even though their mode is
280
@code{VOIDmode}.
281
 
282
@var{constraint} controls reloading and the choice of the best register
283
class to use for a value, as explained later (@pxref{Constraints}).
284
If the constraint would be an empty string, it can be omitted.
285
 
286
People are often unclear on the difference between the constraint and the
287
predicate.  The predicate helps decide whether a given insn matches the
288
pattern.  The constraint plays no role in this decision; instead, it
289
controls various decisions in the case of an insn which does match.
290
 
291
@findex match_scratch
292
@item (match_scratch:@var{m} @var{n} @var{constraint})
293
This expression is also a placeholder for operand number @var{n}
294
and indicates that operand must be a @code{scratch} or @code{reg}
295
expression.
296
 
297
When matching patterns, this is equivalent to
298
 
299
@smallexample
300
(match_operand:@var{m} @var{n} "scratch_operand" @var{pred})
301
@end smallexample
302
 
303
but, when generating RTL, it produces a (@code{scratch}:@var{m})
304
expression.
305
 
306
If the last few expressions in a @code{parallel} are @code{clobber}
307
expressions whose operands are either a hard register or
308
@code{match_scratch}, the combiner can add or delete them when
309
necessary.  @xref{Side Effects}.
310
 
311
@findex match_dup
312
@item (match_dup @var{n})
313
This expression is also a placeholder for operand number @var{n}.
314
It is used when the operand needs to appear more than once in the
315
insn.
316
 
317
In construction, @code{match_dup} acts just like @code{match_operand}:
318
the operand is substituted into the insn being constructed.  But in
319
matching, @code{match_dup} behaves differently.  It assumes that operand
320
number @var{n} has already been determined by a @code{match_operand}
321
appearing earlier in the recognition template, and it matches only an
322
identical-looking expression.
323
 
324
Note that @code{match_dup} should not be used to tell the compiler that
325
a particular register is being used for two operands (example:
326
@code{add} that adds one register to another; the second register is
327
both an input operand and the output operand).  Use a matching
328
constraint (@pxref{Simple Constraints}) for those.  @code{match_dup} is for the cases where one
329
operand is used in two places in the template, such as an instruction
330
that computes both a quotient and a remainder, where the opcode takes
331
two input operands but the RTL template has to refer to each of those
332
twice; once for the quotient pattern and once for the remainder pattern.
333
 
334
@findex match_operator
335
@item (match_operator:@var{m} @var{n} @var{predicate} [@var{operands}@dots{}])
336
This pattern is a kind of placeholder for a variable RTL expression
337
code.
338
 
339
When constructing an insn, it stands for an RTL expression whose
340
expression code is taken from that of operand @var{n}, and whose
341
operands are constructed from the patterns @var{operands}.
342
 
343
When matching an expression, it matches an expression if the function
344
@var{predicate} returns nonzero on that expression @emph{and} the
345
patterns @var{operands} match the operands of the expression.
346
 
347
Suppose that the function @code{commutative_operator} is defined as
348
follows, to match any expression whose operator is one of the
349
commutative arithmetic operators of RTL and whose mode is @var{mode}:
350
 
351
@smallexample
352
int
353
commutative_integer_operator (x, mode)
354
     rtx x;
355
     enum machine_mode mode;
356
@{
357
  enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
358
  if (GET_MODE (x) != mode)
359
    return 0;
360
  return (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == RTX_COMM_ARITH
361
          || code == EQ || code == NE);
362
@}
363
@end smallexample
364
 
365
Then the following pattern will match any RTL expression consisting
366
of a commutative operator applied to two general operands:
367
 
368
@smallexample
369
(match_operator:SI 3 "commutative_operator"
370
  [(match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "g")
371
   (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "g")])
372
@end smallexample
373
 
374
Here the vector @code{[@var{operands}@dots{}]} contains two patterns
375
because the expressions to be matched all contain two operands.
376
 
377
When this pattern does match, the two operands of the commutative
378
operator are recorded as operands 1 and 2 of the insn.  (This is done
379
by the two instances of @code{match_operand}.)  Operand 3 of the insn
380
will be the entire commutative expression: use @code{GET_CODE
381
(operands[3])} to see which commutative operator was used.
382
 
383
The machine mode @var{m} of @code{match_operator} works like that of
384
@code{match_operand}: it is passed as the second argument to the
385
predicate function, and that function is solely responsible for
386
deciding whether the expression to be matched ``has'' that mode.
387
 
388
When constructing an insn, argument 3 of the gen-function will specify
389
the operation (i.e.@: the expression code) for the expression to be
390
made.  It should be an RTL expression, whose expression code is copied
391
into a new expression whose operands are arguments 1 and 2 of the
392
gen-function.  The subexpressions of argument 3 are not used;
393
only its expression code matters.
394
 
395
When @code{match_operator} is used in a pattern for matching an insn,
396
it usually best if the operand number of the @code{match_operator}
397
is higher than that of the actual operands of the insn.  This improves
398
register allocation because the register allocator often looks at
399
operands 1 and 2 of insns to see if it can do register tying.
400
 
401
There is no way to specify constraints in @code{match_operator}.  The
402
operand of the insn which corresponds to the @code{match_operator}
403
never has any constraints because it is never reloaded as a whole.
404
However, if parts of its @var{operands} are matched by
405
@code{match_operand} patterns, those parts may have constraints of
406
their own.
407
 
408
@findex match_op_dup
409
@item (match_op_dup:@var{m} @var{n}[@var{operands}@dots{}])
410
Like @code{match_dup}, except that it applies to operators instead of
411
operands.  When constructing an insn, operand number @var{n} will be
412
substituted at this point.  But in matching, @code{match_op_dup} behaves
413
differently.  It assumes that operand number @var{n} has already been
414
determined by a @code{match_operator} appearing earlier in the
415
recognition template, and it matches only an identical-looking
416
expression.
417
 
418
@findex match_parallel
419
@item (match_parallel @var{n} @var{predicate} [@var{subpat}@dots{}])
420
This pattern is a placeholder for an insn that consists of a
421
@code{parallel} expression with a variable number of elements.  This
422
expression should only appear at the top level of an insn pattern.
423
 
424
When constructing an insn, operand number @var{n} will be substituted at
425
this point.  When matching an insn, it matches if the body of the insn
426
is a @code{parallel} expression with at least as many elements as the
427
vector of @var{subpat} expressions in the @code{match_parallel}, if each
428
@var{subpat} matches the corresponding element of the @code{parallel},
429
@emph{and} the function @var{predicate} returns nonzero on the
430
@code{parallel} that is the body of the insn.  It is the responsibility
431
of the predicate to validate elements of the @code{parallel} beyond
432
those listed in the @code{match_parallel}.
433
 
434
A typical use of @code{match_parallel} is to match load and store
435
multiple expressions, which can contain a variable number of elements
436
in a @code{parallel}.  For example,
437
 
438
@smallexample
439
(define_insn ""
440
  [(match_parallel 0 "load_multiple_operation"
441
     [(set (match_operand:SI 1 "gpc_reg_operand" "=r")
442
           (match_operand:SI 2 "memory_operand" "m"))
443
      (use (reg:SI 179))
444
      (clobber (reg:SI 179))])]
445
  ""
446
  "loadm 0,0,%1,%2")
447
@end smallexample
448
 
449
This example comes from @file{a29k.md}.  The function
450
@code{load_multiple_operation} is defined in @file{a29k.c} and checks
451
that subsequent elements in the @code{parallel} are the same as the
452
@code{set} in the pattern, except that they are referencing subsequent
453
registers and memory locations.
454
 
455
An insn that matches this pattern might look like:
456
 
457
@smallexample
458
(parallel
459
 [(set (reg:SI 20) (mem:SI (reg:SI 100)))
460
  (use (reg:SI 179))
461
  (clobber (reg:SI 179))
462
  (set (reg:SI 21)
463
       (mem:SI (plus:SI (reg:SI 100)
464
                        (const_int 4))))
465
  (set (reg:SI 22)
466
       (mem:SI (plus:SI (reg:SI 100)
467
                        (const_int 8))))])
468
@end smallexample
469
 
470
@findex match_par_dup
471
@item (match_par_dup @var{n} [@var{subpat}@dots{}])
472
Like @code{match_op_dup}, but for @code{match_parallel} instead of
473
@code{match_operator}.
474
 
475
@end table
476
 
477
@node Output Template
478
@section Output Templates and Operand Substitution
479
@cindex output templates
480
@cindex operand substitution
481
 
482
@cindex @samp{%} in template
483
@cindex percent sign
484
The @dfn{output template} is a string which specifies how to output the
485
assembler code for an instruction pattern.  Most of the template is a
486
fixed string which is output literally.  The character @samp{%} is used
487
to specify where to substitute an operand; it can also be used to
488
identify places where different variants of the assembler require
489
different syntax.
490
 
491
In the simplest case, a @samp{%} followed by a digit @var{n} says to output
492
operand @var{n} at that point in the string.
493
 
494
@samp{%} followed by a letter and a digit says to output an operand in an
495
alternate fashion.  Four letters have standard, built-in meanings described
496
below.  The machine description macro @code{PRINT_OPERAND} can define
497
additional letters with nonstandard meanings.
498
 
499
@samp{%c@var{digit}} can be used to substitute an operand that is a
500
constant value without the syntax that normally indicates an immediate
501
operand.
502
 
503
@samp{%n@var{digit}} is like @samp{%c@var{digit}} except that the value of
504
the constant is negated before printing.
505
 
506
@samp{%a@var{digit}} can be used to substitute an operand as if it were a
507
memory reference, with the actual operand treated as the address.  This may
508
be useful when outputting a ``load address'' instruction, because often the
509
assembler syntax for such an instruction requires you to write the operand
510
as if it were a memory reference.
511
 
512
@samp{%l@var{digit}} is used to substitute a @code{label_ref} into a jump
513
instruction.
514
 
515
@samp{%=} outputs a number which is unique to each instruction in the
516
entire compilation.  This is useful for making local labels to be
517
referred to more than once in a single template that generates multiple
518
assembler instructions.
519
 
520
@samp{%} followed by a punctuation character specifies a substitution that
521
does not use an operand.  Only one case is standard: @samp{%%} outputs a
522
@samp{%} into the assembler code.  Other nonstandard cases can be
523
defined in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro.  You must also define
524
which punctuation characters are valid with the
525
@code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} macro.
526
 
527
@cindex \
528
@cindex backslash
529
The template may generate multiple assembler instructions.  Write the text
530
for the instructions, with @samp{\;} between them.
531
 
532
@cindex matching operands
533
When the RTL contains two operands which are required by constraint to match
534
each other, the output template must refer only to the lower-numbered operand.
535
Matching operands are not always identical, and the rest of the compiler
536
arranges to put the proper RTL expression for printing into the lower-numbered
537
operand.
538
 
539
One use of nonstandard letters or punctuation following @samp{%} is to
540
distinguish between different assembler languages for the same machine; for
541
example, Motorola syntax versus MIT syntax for the 68000.  Motorola syntax
542
requires periods in most opcode names, while MIT syntax does not.  For
543
example, the opcode @samp{movel} in MIT syntax is @samp{move.l} in Motorola
544
syntax.  The same file of patterns is used for both kinds of output syntax,
545
but the character sequence @samp{%.} is used in each place where Motorola
546
syntax wants a period.  The @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro for Motorola syntax
547
defines the sequence to output a period; the macro for MIT syntax defines
548
it to do nothing.
549
 
550
@cindex @code{#} in template
551
As a special case, a template consisting of the single character @code{#}
552
instructs the compiler to first split the insn, and then output the
553
resulting instructions separately.  This helps eliminate redundancy in the
554
output templates.   If you have a @code{define_insn} that needs to emit
555
multiple assembler instructions, and there is a matching @code{define_split}
556
already defined, then you can simply use @code{#} as the output template
557
instead of writing an output template that emits the multiple assembler
558
instructions.
559
 
560
If the macro @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is defined, you can use construct
561
of the form @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@}} in the templates.  These
562
describe multiple variants of assembler language syntax.
563
@xref{Instruction Output}.
564
 
565
@node Output Statement
566
@section C Statements for Assembler Output
567
@cindex output statements
568
@cindex C statements for assembler output
569
@cindex generating assembler output
570
 
571
Often a single fixed template string cannot produce correct and efficient
572
assembler code for all the cases that are recognized by a single
573
instruction pattern.  For example, the opcodes may depend on the kinds of
574
operands; or some unfortunate combinations of operands may require extra
575
machine instructions.
576
 
577
If the output control string starts with a @samp{@@}, then it is actually
578
a series of templates, each on a separate line.  (Blank lines and
579
leading spaces and tabs are ignored.)  The templates correspond to the
580
pattern's constraint alternatives (@pxref{Multi-Alternative}).  For example,
581
if a target machine has a two-address add instruction @samp{addr} to add
582
into a register and another @samp{addm} to add a register to memory, you
583
might write this pattern:
584
 
585
@smallexample
586
(define_insn "addsi3"
587
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,m")
588
        (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0,0")
589
                 (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "g,r")))]
590
  ""
591
  "@@
592
   addr %2,%0
593
   addm %2,%0")
594
@end smallexample
595
 
596
@cindex @code{*} in template
597
@cindex asterisk in template
598
If the output control string starts with a @samp{*}, then it is not an
599
output template but rather a piece of C program that should compute a
600
template.  It should execute a @code{return} statement to return the
601
template-string you want.  Most such templates use C string literals, which
602
require doublequote characters to delimit them.  To include these
603
doublequote characters in the string, prefix each one with @samp{\}.
604
 
605
If the output control string is written as a brace block instead of a
606
double-quoted string, it is automatically assumed to be C code.  In that
607
case, it is not necessary to put in a leading asterisk, or to escape the
608
doublequotes surrounding C string literals.
609
 
610
The operands may be found in the array @code{operands}, whose C data type
611
is @code{rtx []}.
612
 
613
It is very common to select different ways of generating assembler code
614
based on whether an immediate operand is within a certain range.  Be
615
careful when doing this, because the result of @code{INTVAL} is an
616
integer on the host machine.  If the host machine has more bits in an
617
@code{int} than the target machine has in the mode in which the constant
618
will be used, then some of the bits you get from @code{INTVAL} will be
619
superfluous.  For proper results, you must carefully disregard the
620
values of those bits.
621
 
622
@findex output_asm_insn
623
It is possible to output an assembler instruction and then go on to output
624
or compute more of them, using the subroutine @code{output_asm_insn}.  This
625
receives two arguments: a template-string and a vector of operands.  The
626
vector may be @code{operands}, or it may be another array of @code{rtx}
627
that you declare locally and initialize yourself.
628
 
629
@findex which_alternative
630
When an insn pattern has multiple alternatives in its constraints, often
631
the appearance of the assembler code is determined mostly by which alternative
632
was matched.  When this is so, the C code can test the variable
633
@code{which_alternative}, which is the ordinal number of the alternative
634
that was actually satisfied (0 for the first, 1 for the second alternative,
635
etc.).
636
 
637
For example, suppose there are two opcodes for storing zero, @samp{clrreg}
638
for registers and @samp{clrmem} for memory locations.  Here is how
639
a pattern could use @code{which_alternative} to choose between them:
640
 
641
@smallexample
642
(define_insn ""
643
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,m")
644
        (const_int 0))]
645
  ""
646
  @{
647
  return (which_alternative == 0
648
          ? "clrreg %0" : "clrmem %0");
649
  @})
650
@end smallexample
651
 
652
The example above, where the assembler code to generate was
653
@emph{solely} determined by the alternative, could also have been specified
654
as follows, having the output control string start with a @samp{@@}:
655
 
656
@smallexample
657
@group
658
(define_insn ""
659
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,m")
660
        (const_int 0))]
661
  ""
662
  "@@
663
   clrreg %0
664
   clrmem %0")
665
@end group
666
@end smallexample
667
 
668
@node Predicates
669
@section Predicates
670
@cindex predicates
671
@cindex operand predicates
672
@cindex operator predicates
673
 
674
A predicate determines whether a @code{match_operand} or
675
@code{match_operator} expression matches, and therefore whether the
676
surrounding instruction pattern will be used for that combination of
677
operands.  GCC has a number of machine-independent predicates, and you
678
can define machine-specific predicates as needed.  By convention,
679
predicates used with @code{match_operand} have names that end in
680
@samp{_operand}, and those used with @code{match_operator} have names
681
that end in @samp{_operator}.
682
 
683
All predicates are Boolean functions (in the mathematical sense) of
684
two arguments: the RTL expression that is being considered at that
685
position in the instruction pattern, and the machine mode that the
686
@code{match_operand} or @code{match_operator} specifies.  In this
687
section, the first argument is called @var{op} and the second argument
688
@var{mode}.  Predicates can be called from C as ordinary two-argument
689
functions; this can be useful in output templates or other
690
machine-specific code.
691
 
692
Operand predicates can allow operands that are not actually acceptable
693
to the hardware, as long as the constraints give reload the ability to
694
fix them up (@pxref{Constraints}).  However, GCC will usually generate
695
better code if the predicates specify the requirements of the machine
696
instructions as closely as possible.  Reload cannot fix up operands
697
that must be constants (``immediate operands''); you must use a
698
predicate that allows only constants, or else enforce the requirement
699
in the extra condition.
700
 
701
@cindex predicates and machine modes
702
@cindex normal predicates
703
@cindex special predicates
704
Most predicates handle their @var{mode} argument in a uniform manner.
705
If @var{mode} is @code{VOIDmode} (unspecified), then @var{op} can have
706
any mode.  If @var{mode} is anything else, then @var{op} must have the
707
same mode, unless @var{op} is a @code{CONST_INT} or integer
708
@code{CONST_DOUBLE}.  These RTL expressions always have
709
@code{VOIDmode}, so it would be counterproductive to check that their
710
mode matches.  Instead, predicates that accept @code{CONST_INT} and/or
711
integer @code{CONST_DOUBLE} check that the value stored in the
712
constant will fit in the requested mode.
713
 
714
Predicates with this behavior are called @dfn{normal}.
715
@command{genrecog} can optimize the instruction recognizer based on
716
knowledge of how normal predicates treat modes.  It can also diagnose
717
certain kinds of common errors in the use of normal predicates; for
718
instance, it is almost always an error to use a normal predicate
719
without specifying a mode.
720
 
721
Predicates that do something different with their @var{mode} argument
722
are called @dfn{special}.  The generic predicates
723
@code{address_operand} and @code{pmode_register_operand} are special
724
predicates.  @command{genrecog} does not do any optimizations or
725
diagnosis when special predicates are used.
726
 
727
@menu
728
* Machine-Independent Predicates::  Predicates available to all back ends.
729
* Defining Predicates::             How to write machine-specific predicate
730
                                    functions.
731
@end menu
732
 
733
@node Machine-Independent Predicates
734
@subsection Machine-Independent Predicates
735
@cindex machine-independent predicates
736
@cindex generic predicates
737
 
738
These are the generic predicates available to all back ends.  They are
739
defined in @file{recog.c}.  The first category of predicates allow
740
only constant, or @dfn{immediate}, operands.
741
 
742
@defun immediate_operand
743
This predicate allows any sort of constant that fits in @var{mode}.
744
It is an appropriate choice for instructions that take operands that
745
must be constant.
746
@end defun
747
 
748
@defun const_int_operand
749
This predicate allows any @code{CONST_INT} expression that fits in
750
@var{mode}.  It is an appropriate choice for an immediate operand that
751
does not allow a symbol or label.
752
@end defun
753
 
754
@defun const_double_operand
755
This predicate accepts any @code{CONST_DOUBLE} expression that has
756
exactly @var{mode}.  If @var{mode} is @code{VOIDmode}, it will also
757
accept @code{CONST_INT}.  It is intended for immediate floating point
758
constants.
759
@end defun
760
 
761
@noindent
762
The second category of predicates allow only some kind of machine
763
register.
764
 
765
@defun register_operand
766
This predicate allows any @code{REG} or @code{SUBREG} expression that
767
is valid for @var{mode}.  It is often suitable for arithmetic
768
instruction operands on a RISC machine.
769
@end defun
770
 
771
@defun pmode_register_operand
772
This is a slight variant on @code{register_operand} which works around
773
a limitation in the machine-description reader.
774
 
775
@smallexample
776
(match_operand @var{n} "pmode_register_operand" @var{constraint})
777
@end smallexample
778
 
779
@noindent
780
means exactly what
781
 
782
@smallexample
783
(match_operand:P @var{n} "register_operand" @var{constraint})
784
@end smallexample
785
 
786
@noindent
787
would mean, if the machine-description reader accepted @samp{:P}
788
mode suffixes.  Unfortunately, it cannot, because @code{Pmode} is an
789
alias for some other mode, and might vary with machine-specific
790
options.  @xref{Misc}.
791
@end defun
792
 
793
@defun scratch_operand
794
This predicate allows hard registers and @code{SCRATCH} expressions,
795
but not pseudo-registers.  It is used internally by @code{match_scratch};
796
it should not be used directly.
797
@end defun
798
 
799
@noindent
800
The third category of predicates allow only some kind of memory reference.
801
 
802
@defun memory_operand
803
This predicate allows any valid reference to a quantity of mode
804
@var{mode} in memory, as determined by the weak form of
805
@code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} (@pxref{Addressing Modes}).
806
@end defun
807
 
808
@defun address_operand
809
This predicate is a little unusual; it allows any operand that is a
810
valid expression for the @emph{address} of a quantity of mode
811
@var{mode}, again determined by the weak form of
812
@code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS}.  To first order, if
813
@samp{@w{(mem:@var{mode} (@var{exp}))}} is acceptable to
814
@code{memory_operand}, then @var{exp} is acceptable to
815
@code{address_operand}.  Note that @var{exp} does not necessarily have
816
the mode @var{mode}.
817
@end defun
818
 
819
@defun indirect_operand
820
This is a stricter form of @code{memory_operand} which allows only
821
memory references with a @code{general_operand} as the address
822
expression.  New uses of this predicate are discouraged, because
823
@code{general_operand} is very permissive, so it's hard to tell what
824
an @code{indirect_operand} does or does not allow.  If a target has
825
different requirements for memory operands for different instructions,
826
it is better to define target-specific predicates which enforce the
827
hardware's requirements explicitly.
828
@end defun
829
 
830
@defun push_operand
831
This predicate allows a memory reference suitable for pushing a value
832
onto the stack.  This will be a @code{MEM} which refers to
833
@code{stack_pointer_rtx}, with a side-effect in its address expression
834
(@pxref{Incdec}); which one is determined by the
835
@code{STACK_PUSH_CODE} macro (@pxref{Frame Layout}).
836
@end defun
837
 
838
@defun pop_operand
839
This predicate allows a memory reference suitable for popping a value
840
off the stack.  Again, this will be a @code{MEM} referring to
841
@code{stack_pointer_rtx}, with a side-effect in its address
842
expression.  However, this time @code{STACK_POP_CODE} is expected.
843
@end defun
844
 
845
@noindent
846
The fourth category of predicates allow some combination of the above
847
operands.
848
 
849
@defun nonmemory_operand
850
This predicate allows any immediate or register operand valid for @var{mode}.
851
@end defun
852
 
853
@defun nonimmediate_operand
854
This predicate allows any register or memory operand valid for @var{mode}.
855
@end defun
856
 
857
@defun general_operand
858
This predicate allows any immediate, register, or memory operand
859
valid for @var{mode}.
860
@end defun
861
 
862
@noindent
863
Finally, there are two generic operator predicates.
864
 
865
@defun comparison_operator
866
This predicate matches any expression which performs an arithmetic
867
comparison in @var{mode}; that is, @code{COMPARISON_P} is true for the
868
expression code.
869
@end defun
870
 
871
@defun ordered_comparison_operator
872
This predicate matches any expression which performs an arithmetic
873
comparison in @var{mode} and whose expression code is valid for integer
874
modes; that is, the expression code will be one of @code{eq}, @code{ne},
875
@code{lt}, @code{ltu}, @code{le}, @code{leu}, @code{gt}, @code{gtu},
876
@code{ge}, @code{geu}.
877
@end defun
878
 
879
@node Defining Predicates
880
@subsection Defining Machine-Specific Predicates
881
@cindex defining predicates
882
@findex define_predicate
883
@findex define_special_predicate
884
 
885
Many machines have requirements for their operands that cannot be
886
expressed precisely using the generic predicates.  You can define
887
additional predicates using @code{define_predicate} and
888
@code{define_special_predicate} expressions.  These expressions have
889
three operands:
890
 
891
@itemize @bullet
892
@item
893
The name of the predicate, as it will be referred to in
894
@code{match_operand} or @code{match_operator} expressions.
895
 
896
@item
897
An RTL expression which evaluates to true if the predicate allows the
898
operand @var{op}, false if it does not.  This expression can only use
899
the following RTL codes:
900
 
901
@table @code
902
@item MATCH_OPERAND
903
When written inside a predicate expression, a @code{MATCH_OPERAND}
904
expression evaluates to true if the predicate it names would allow
905
@var{op}.  The operand number and constraint are ignored.  Due to
906
limitations in @command{genrecog}, you can only refer to generic
907
predicates and predicates that have already been defined.
908
 
909
@item MATCH_CODE
910
This expression evaluates to true if @var{op} or a specified
911
subexpression of @var{op} has one of a given list of RTX codes.
912
 
913
The first operand of this expression is a string constant containing a
914
comma-separated list of RTX code names (in lower case).  These are the
915
codes for which the @code{MATCH_CODE} will be true.
916
 
917
The second operand is a string constant which indicates what
918
subexpression of @var{op} to examine.  If it is absent or the empty
919
string, @var{op} itself is examined.  Otherwise, the string constant
920
must be a sequence of digits and/or lowercase letters.  Each character
921
indicates a subexpression to extract from the current expression; for
922
the first character this is @var{op}, for the second and subsequent
923
characters it is the result of the previous character.  A digit
924
@var{n} extracts @samp{@w{XEXP (@var{e}, @var{n})}}; a letter @var{l}
925
extracts @samp{@w{XVECEXP (@var{e}, 0, @var{n})}} where @var{n} is the
926
alphabetic ordinal of @var{l} (0 for `a', 1 for 'b', and so on).  The
927
@code{MATCH_CODE} then examines the RTX code of the subexpression
928
extracted by the complete string.  It is not possible to extract
929
components of an @code{rtvec} that is not at position 0 within its RTX
930
object.
931
 
932
@item MATCH_TEST
933
This expression has one operand, a string constant containing a C
934
expression.  The predicate's arguments, @var{op} and @var{mode}, are
935
available with those names in the C expression.  The @code{MATCH_TEST}
936
evaluates to true if the C expression evaluates to a nonzero value.
937
@code{MATCH_TEST} expressions must not have side effects.
938
 
939
@item  AND
940
@itemx IOR
941
@itemx NOT
942
@itemx IF_THEN_ELSE
943
The basic @samp{MATCH_} expressions can be combined using these
944
logical operators, which have the semantics of the C operators
945
@samp{&&}, @samp{||}, @samp{!}, and @samp{@w{? :}} respectively.  As
946
in Common Lisp, you may give an @code{AND} or @code{IOR} expression an
947
arbitrary number of arguments; this has exactly the same effect as
948
writing a chain of two-argument @code{AND} or @code{IOR} expressions.
949
@end table
950
 
951
@item
952
An optional block of C code, which should execute
953
@samp{@w{return true}} if the predicate is found to match and
954
@samp{@w{return false}} if it does not.  It must not have any side
955
effects.  The predicate arguments, @var{op} and @var{mode}, are
956
available with those names.
957
 
958
If a code block is present in a predicate definition, then the RTL
959
expression must evaluate to true @emph{and} the code block must
960
execute @samp{@w{return true}} for the predicate to allow the operand.
961
The RTL expression is evaluated first; do not re-check anything in the
962
code block that was checked in the RTL expression.
963
@end itemize
964
 
965
The program @command{genrecog} scans @code{define_predicate} and
966
@code{define_special_predicate} expressions to determine which RTX
967
codes are possibly allowed.  You should always make this explicit in
968
the RTL predicate expression, using @code{MATCH_OPERAND} and
969
@code{MATCH_CODE}.
970
 
971
Here is an example of a simple predicate definition, from the IA64
972
machine description:
973
 
974
@smallexample
975
@group
976
;; @r{True if @var{op} is a @code{SYMBOL_REF} which refers to the sdata section.}
977
(define_predicate "small_addr_symbolic_operand"
978
  (and (match_code "symbol_ref")
979
       (match_test "SYMBOL_REF_SMALL_ADDR_P (op)")))
980
@end group
981
@end smallexample
982
 
983
@noindent
984
And here is another, showing the use of the C block.
985
 
986
@smallexample
987
@group
988
;; @r{True if @var{op} is a register operand that is (or could be) a GR reg.}
989
(define_predicate "gr_register_operand"
990
  (match_operand 0 "register_operand")
991
@{
992
  unsigned int regno;
993
  if (GET_CODE (op) == SUBREG)
994
    op = SUBREG_REG (op);
995
 
996
  regno = REGNO (op);
997
  return (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || GENERAL_REGNO_P (regno));
998
@})
999
@end group
1000
@end smallexample
1001
 
1002
Predicates written with @code{define_predicate} automatically include
1003
a test that @var{mode} is @code{VOIDmode}, or @var{op} has the same
1004
mode as @var{mode}, or @var{op} is a @code{CONST_INT} or
1005
@code{CONST_DOUBLE}.  They do @emph{not} check specifically for
1006
integer @code{CONST_DOUBLE}, nor do they test that the value of either
1007
kind of constant fits in the requested mode.  This is because
1008
target-specific predicates that take constants usually have to do more
1009
stringent value checks anyway.  If you need the exact same treatment
1010
of @code{CONST_INT} or @code{CONST_DOUBLE} that the generic predicates
1011
provide, use a @code{MATCH_OPERAND} subexpression to call
1012
@code{const_int_operand}, @code{const_double_operand}, or
1013
@code{immediate_operand}.
1014
 
1015
Predicates written with @code{define_special_predicate} do not get any
1016
automatic mode checks, and are treated as having special mode handling
1017
by @command{genrecog}.
1018
 
1019
The program @command{genpreds} is responsible for generating code to
1020
test predicates.  It also writes a header file containing function
1021
declarations for all machine-specific predicates.  It is not necessary
1022
to declare these predicates in @file{@var{cpu}-protos.h}.
1023
@end ifset
1024
 
1025
@c Most of this node appears by itself (in a different place) even
1026
@c when the INTERNALS flag is clear.  Passages that require the internals
1027
@c manual's context are conditionalized to appear only in the internals manual.
1028
@ifset INTERNALS
1029
@node Constraints
1030
@section Operand Constraints
1031
@cindex operand constraints
1032
@cindex constraints
1033
 
1034
Each @code{match_operand} in an instruction pattern can specify
1035
constraints for the operands allowed.  The constraints allow you to
1036
fine-tune matching within the set of operands allowed by the
1037
predicate.
1038
 
1039
@end ifset
1040
@ifclear INTERNALS
1041
@node Constraints
1042
@section Constraints for @code{asm} Operands
1043
@cindex operand constraints, @code{asm}
1044
@cindex constraints, @code{asm}
1045
@cindex @code{asm} constraints
1046
 
1047
Here are specific details on what constraint letters you can use with
1048
@code{asm} operands.
1049
@end ifclear
1050
Constraints can say whether
1051
an operand may be in a register, and which kinds of register; whether the
1052
operand can be a memory reference, and which kinds of address; whether the
1053
operand may be an immediate constant, and which possible values it may
1054
have.  Constraints can also require two operands to match.
1055
 
1056
@ifset INTERNALS
1057
@menu
1058
* Simple Constraints::  Basic use of constraints.
1059
* Multi-Alternative::   When an insn has two alternative constraint-patterns.
1060
* Class Preferences::   Constraints guide which hard register to put things in.
1061
* Modifiers::           More precise control over effects of constraints.
1062
* Disable Insn Alternatives:: Disable insn alternatives using the @code{enabled} attribute.
1063
* Machine Constraints:: Existing constraints for some particular machines.
1064
* Define Constraints::  How to define machine-specific constraints.
1065
* C Constraint Interface:: How to test constraints from C code.
1066
@end menu
1067
@end ifset
1068
 
1069
@ifclear INTERNALS
1070
@menu
1071
* Simple Constraints::  Basic use of constraints.
1072
* Multi-Alternative::   When an insn has two alternative constraint-patterns.
1073
* Modifiers::           More precise control over effects of constraints.
1074
* Machine Constraints:: Special constraints for some particular machines.
1075
@end menu
1076
@end ifclear
1077
 
1078
@node Simple Constraints
1079
@subsection Simple Constraints
1080
@cindex simple constraints
1081
 
1082
The simplest kind of constraint is a string full of letters, each of
1083
which describes one kind of operand that is permitted.  Here are
1084
the letters that are allowed:
1085
 
1086
@table @asis
1087
@item whitespace
1088
Whitespace characters are ignored and can be inserted at any position
1089
except the first.  This enables each alternative for different operands to
1090
be visually aligned in the machine description even if they have different
1091
number of constraints and modifiers.
1092
 
1093
@cindex @samp{m} in constraint
1094
@cindex memory references in constraints
1095
@item @samp{m}
1096
A memory operand is allowed, with any kind of address that the machine
1097
supports in general.
1098
Note that the letter used for the general memory constraint can be
1099
re-defined by a back end using the @code{TARGET_MEM_CONSTRAINT} macro.
1100
 
1101
@cindex offsettable address
1102
@cindex @samp{o} in constraint
1103
@item @samp{o}
1104
A memory operand is allowed, but only if the address is
1105
@dfn{offsettable}.  This means that adding a small integer (actually,
1106
the width in bytes of the operand, as determined by its machine mode)
1107
may be added to the address and the result is also a valid memory
1108
address.
1109
 
1110
@cindex autoincrement/decrement addressing
1111
For example, an address which is constant is offsettable; so is an
1112
address that is the sum of a register and a constant (as long as a
1113
slightly larger constant is also within the range of address-offsets
1114
supported by the machine); but an autoincrement or autodecrement
1115
address is not offsettable.  More complicated indirect/indexed
1116
addresses may or may not be offsettable depending on the other
1117
addressing modes that the machine supports.
1118
 
1119
Note that in an output operand which can be matched by another
1120
operand, the constraint letter @samp{o} is valid only when accompanied
1121
by both @samp{<} (if the target machine has predecrement addressing)
1122
and @samp{>} (if the target machine has preincrement addressing).
1123
 
1124
@cindex @samp{V} in constraint
1125
@item @samp{V}
1126
A memory operand that is not offsettable.  In other words, anything that
1127
would fit the @samp{m} constraint but not the @samp{o} constraint.
1128
 
1129
@cindex @samp{<} in constraint
1130
@item @samp{<}
1131
A memory operand with autodecrement addressing (either predecrement or
1132
postdecrement) is allowed.
1133
 
1134
@cindex @samp{>} in constraint
1135
@item @samp{>}
1136
A memory operand with autoincrement addressing (either preincrement or
1137
postincrement) is allowed.
1138
 
1139
@cindex @samp{r} in constraint
1140
@cindex registers in constraints
1141
@item @samp{r}
1142
A register operand is allowed provided that it is in a general
1143
register.
1144
 
1145
@cindex constants in constraints
1146
@cindex @samp{i} in constraint
1147
@item @samp{i}
1148
An immediate integer operand (one with constant value) is allowed.
1149
This includes symbolic constants whose values will be known only at
1150
assembly time or later.
1151
 
1152
@cindex @samp{n} in constraint
1153
@item @samp{n}
1154
An immediate integer operand with a known numeric value is allowed.
1155
Many systems cannot support assembly-time constants for operands less
1156
than a word wide.  Constraints for these operands should use @samp{n}
1157
rather than @samp{i}.
1158
 
1159
@cindex @samp{I} in constraint
1160
@item @samp{I}, @samp{J}, @samp{K}, @dots{} @samp{P}
1161
Other letters in the range @samp{I} through @samp{P} may be defined in
1162
a machine-dependent fashion to permit immediate integer operands with
1163
explicit integer values in specified ranges.  For example, on the
1164
68000, @samp{I} is defined to stand for the range of values 1 to 8.
1165
This is the range permitted as a shift count in the shift
1166
instructions.
1167
 
1168
@cindex @samp{E} in constraint
1169
@item @samp{E}
1170
An immediate floating operand (expression code @code{const_double}) is
1171
allowed, but only if the target floating point format is the same as
1172
that of the host machine (on which the compiler is running).
1173
 
1174
@cindex @samp{F} in constraint
1175
@item @samp{F}
1176
An immediate floating operand (expression code @code{const_double} or
1177
@code{const_vector}) is allowed.
1178
 
1179
@cindex @samp{G} in constraint
1180
@cindex @samp{H} in constraint
1181
@item @samp{G}, @samp{H}
1182
@samp{G} and @samp{H} may be defined in a machine-dependent fashion to
1183
permit immediate floating operands in particular ranges of values.
1184
 
1185
@cindex @samp{s} in constraint
1186
@item @samp{s}
1187
An immediate integer operand whose value is not an explicit integer is
1188
allowed.
1189
 
1190
This might appear strange; if an insn allows a constant operand with a
1191
value not known at compile time, it certainly must allow any known
1192
value.  So why use @samp{s} instead of @samp{i}?  Sometimes it allows
1193
better code to be generated.
1194
 
1195
For example, on the 68000 in a fullword instruction it is possible to
1196
use an immediate operand; but if the immediate value is between @minus{}128
1197
and 127, better code results from loading the value into a register and
1198
using the register.  This is because the load into the register can be
1199
done with a @samp{moveq} instruction.  We arrange for this to happen
1200
by defining the letter @samp{K} to mean ``any integer outside the
1201
range @minus{}128 to 127'', and then specifying @samp{Ks} in the operand
1202
constraints.
1203
 
1204
@cindex @samp{g} in constraint
1205
@item @samp{g}
1206
Any register, memory or immediate integer operand is allowed, except for
1207
registers that are not general registers.
1208
 
1209
@cindex @samp{X} in constraint
1210
@item @samp{X}
1211
@ifset INTERNALS
1212
Any operand whatsoever is allowed, even if it does not satisfy
1213
@code{general_operand}.  This is normally used in the constraint of
1214
a @code{match_scratch} when certain alternatives will not actually
1215
require a scratch register.
1216
@end ifset
1217
@ifclear INTERNALS
1218
Any operand whatsoever is allowed.
1219
@end ifclear
1220
 
1221
@cindex @samp{0} in constraint
1222
@cindex digits in constraint
1223
@item @samp{0}, @samp{1}, @samp{2}, @dots{} @samp{9}
1224
An operand that matches the specified operand number is allowed.  If a
1225
digit is used together with letters within the same alternative, the
1226
digit should come last.
1227
 
1228
This number is allowed to be more than a single digit.  If multiple
1229
digits are encountered consecutively, they are interpreted as a single
1230
decimal integer.  There is scant chance for ambiguity, since to-date
1231
it has never been desirable that @samp{10} be interpreted as matching
1232
either operand 1 @emph{or} operand 0.  Should this be desired, one
1233
can use multiple alternatives instead.
1234
 
1235
@cindex matching constraint
1236
@cindex constraint, matching
1237
This is called a @dfn{matching constraint} and what it really means is
1238
that the assembler has only a single operand that fills two roles
1239
@ifset INTERNALS
1240
considered separate in the RTL insn.  For example, an add insn has two
1241
input operands and one output operand in the RTL, but on most CISC
1242
@end ifset
1243
@ifclear INTERNALS
1244
which @code{asm} distinguishes.  For example, an add instruction uses
1245
two input operands and an output operand, but on most CISC
1246
@end ifclear
1247
machines an add instruction really has only two operands, one of them an
1248
input-output operand:
1249
 
1250
@smallexample
1251
addl #35,r12
1252
@end smallexample
1253
 
1254
Matching constraints are used in these circumstances.
1255
More precisely, the two operands that match must include one input-only
1256
operand and one output-only operand.  Moreover, the digit must be a
1257
smaller number than the number of the operand that uses it in the
1258
constraint.
1259
 
1260
@ifset INTERNALS
1261
For operands to match in a particular case usually means that they
1262
are identical-looking RTL expressions.  But in a few special cases
1263
specific kinds of dissimilarity are allowed.  For example, @code{*x}
1264
as an input operand will match @code{*x++} as an output operand.
1265
For proper results in such cases, the output template should always
1266
use the output-operand's number when printing the operand.
1267
@end ifset
1268
 
1269
@cindex load address instruction
1270
@cindex push address instruction
1271
@cindex address constraints
1272
@cindex @samp{p} in constraint
1273
@item @samp{p}
1274
An operand that is a valid memory address is allowed.  This is
1275
for ``load address'' and ``push address'' instructions.
1276
 
1277
@findex address_operand
1278
@samp{p} in the constraint must be accompanied by @code{address_operand}
1279
as the predicate in the @code{match_operand}.  This predicate interprets
1280
the mode specified in the @code{match_operand} as the mode of the memory
1281
reference for which the address would be valid.
1282
 
1283
@cindex other register constraints
1284
@cindex extensible constraints
1285
@item @var{other-letters}
1286
Other letters can be defined in machine-dependent fashion to stand for
1287
particular classes of registers or other arbitrary operand types.
1288
@samp{d}, @samp{a} and @samp{f} are defined on the 68000/68020 to stand
1289
for data, address and floating point registers.
1290
@end table
1291
 
1292
@ifset INTERNALS
1293
In order to have valid assembler code, each operand must satisfy
1294
its constraint.  But a failure to do so does not prevent the pattern
1295
from applying to an insn.  Instead, it directs the compiler to modify
1296
the code so that the constraint will be satisfied.  Usually this is
1297
done by copying an operand into a register.
1298
 
1299
Contrast, therefore, the two instruction patterns that follow:
1300
 
1301
@smallexample
1302
(define_insn ""
1303
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r")
1304
        (plus:SI (match_dup 0)
1305
                 (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "r")))]
1306
  ""
1307
  "@dots{}")
1308
@end smallexample
1309
 
1310
@noindent
1311
which has two operands, one of which must appear in two places, and
1312
 
1313
@smallexample
1314
(define_insn ""
1315
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r")
1316
        (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0")
1317
                 (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "r")))]
1318
  ""
1319
  "@dots{}")
1320
@end smallexample
1321
 
1322
@noindent
1323
which has three operands, two of which are required by a constraint to be
1324
identical.  If we are considering an insn of the form
1325
 
1326
@smallexample
1327
(insn @var{n} @var{prev} @var{next}
1328
  (set (reg:SI 3)
1329
       (plus:SI (reg:SI 6) (reg:SI 109)))
1330
  @dots{})
1331
@end smallexample
1332
 
1333
@noindent
1334
the first pattern would not apply at all, because this insn does not
1335
contain two identical subexpressions in the right place.  The pattern would
1336
say, ``That does not look like an add instruction; try other patterns''.
1337
The second pattern would say, ``Yes, that's an add instruction, but there
1338
is something wrong with it''.  It would direct the reload pass of the
1339
compiler to generate additional insns to make the constraint true.  The
1340
results might look like this:
1341
 
1342
@smallexample
1343
(insn @var{n2} @var{prev} @var{n}
1344
  (set (reg:SI 3) (reg:SI 6))
1345
  @dots{})
1346
 
1347
(insn @var{n} @var{n2} @var{next}
1348
  (set (reg:SI 3)
1349
       (plus:SI (reg:SI 3) (reg:SI 109)))
1350
  @dots{})
1351
@end smallexample
1352
 
1353
It is up to you to make sure that each operand, in each pattern, has
1354
constraints that can handle any RTL expression that could be present for
1355
that operand.  (When multiple alternatives are in use, each pattern must,
1356
for each possible combination of operand expressions, have at least one
1357
alternative which can handle that combination of operands.)  The
1358
constraints don't need to @emph{allow} any possible operand---when this is
1359
the case, they do not constrain---but they must at least point the way to
1360
reloading any possible operand so that it will fit.
1361
 
1362
@itemize @bullet
1363
@item
1364
If the constraint accepts whatever operands the predicate permits,
1365
there is no problem: reloading is never necessary for this operand.
1366
 
1367
For example, an operand whose constraints permit everything except
1368
registers is safe provided its predicate rejects registers.
1369
 
1370
An operand whose predicate accepts only constant values is safe
1371
provided its constraints include the letter @samp{i}.  If any possible
1372
constant value is accepted, then nothing less than @samp{i} will do;
1373
if the predicate is more selective, then the constraints may also be
1374
more selective.
1375
 
1376
@item
1377
Any operand expression can be reloaded by copying it into a register.
1378
So if an operand's constraints allow some kind of register, it is
1379
certain to be safe.  It need not permit all classes of registers; the
1380
compiler knows how to copy a register into another register of the
1381
proper class in order to make an instruction valid.
1382
 
1383
@cindex nonoffsettable memory reference
1384
@cindex memory reference, nonoffsettable
1385
@item
1386
A nonoffsettable memory reference can be reloaded by copying the
1387
address into a register.  So if the constraint uses the letter
1388
@samp{o}, all memory references are taken care of.
1389
 
1390
@item
1391
A constant operand can be reloaded by allocating space in memory to
1392
hold it as preinitialized data.  Then the memory reference can be used
1393
in place of the constant.  So if the constraint uses the letters
1394
@samp{o} or @samp{m}, constant operands are not a problem.
1395
 
1396
@item
1397
If the constraint permits a constant and a pseudo register used in an insn
1398
was not allocated to a hard register and is equivalent to a constant,
1399
the register will be replaced with the constant.  If the predicate does
1400
not permit a constant and the insn is re-recognized for some reason, the
1401
compiler will crash.  Thus the predicate must always recognize any
1402
objects allowed by the constraint.
1403
@end itemize
1404
 
1405
If the operand's predicate can recognize registers, but the constraint does
1406
not permit them, it can make the compiler crash.  When this operand happens
1407
to be a register, the reload pass will be stymied, because it does not know
1408
how to copy a register temporarily into memory.
1409
 
1410
If the predicate accepts a unary operator, the constraint applies to the
1411
operand.  For example, the MIPS processor at ISA level 3 supports an
1412
instruction which adds two registers in @code{SImode} to produce a
1413
@code{DImode} result, but only if the registers are correctly sign
1414
extended.  This predicate for the input operands accepts a
1415
@code{sign_extend} of an @code{SImode} register.  Write the constraint
1416
to indicate the type of register that is required for the operand of the
1417
@code{sign_extend}.
1418
@end ifset
1419
 
1420
@node Multi-Alternative
1421
@subsection Multiple Alternative Constraints
1422
@cindex multiple alternative constraints
1423
 
1424
Sometimes a single instruction has multiple alternative sets of possible
1425
operands.  For example, on the 68000, a logical-or instruction can combine
1426
register or an immediate value into memory, or it can combine any kind of
1427
operand into a register; but it cannot combine one memory location into
1428
another.
1429
 
1430
These constraints are represented as multiple alternatives.  An alternative
1431
can be described by a series of letters for each operand.  The overall
1432
constraint for an operand is made from the letters for this operand
1433
from the first alternative, a comma, the letters for this operand from
1434
the second alternative, a comma, and so on until the last alternative.
1435
@ifset INTERNALS
1436
Here is how it is done for fullword logical-or on the 68000:
1437
 
1438
@smallexample
1439
(define_insn "iorsi3"
1440
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=m,d")
1441
        (ior:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "%0,0")
1442
                (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "dKs,dmKs")))]
1443
  @dots{})
1444
@end smallexample
1445
 
1446
The first alternative has @samp{m} (memory) for operand 0, @samp{0} for
1447
operand 1 (meaning it must match operand 0), and @samp{dKs} for operand
1448
2.  The second alternative has @samp{d} (data register) for operand 0,
1449
@samp{0} for operand 1, and @samp{dmKs} for operand 2.  The @samp{=} and
1450
@samp{%} in the constraints apply to all the alternatives; their
1451
meaning is explained in the next section (@pxref{Class Preferences}).
1452
@end ifset
1453
 
1454
@c FIXME Is this ? and ! stuff of use in asm()?  If not, hide unless INTERNAL
1455
If all the operands fit any one alternative, the instruction is valid.
1456
Otherwise, for each alternative, the compiler counts how many instructions
1457
must be added to copy the operands so that that alternative applies.
1458
The alternative requiring the least copying is chosen.  If two alternatives
1459
need the same amount of copying, the one that comes first is chosen.
1460
These choices can be altered with the @samp{?} and @samp{!} characters:
1461
 
1462
@table @code
1463
@cindex @samp{?} in constraint
1464
@cindex question mark
1465
@item ?
1466
Disparage slightly the alternative that the @samp{?} appears in,
1467
as a choice when no alternative applies exactly.  The compiler regards
1468
this alternative as one unit more costly for each @samp{?} that appears
1469
in it.
1470
 
1471
@cindex @samp{!} in constraint
1472
@cindex exclamation point
1473
@item !
1474
Disparage severely the alternative that the @samp{!} appears in.
1475
This alternative can still be used if it fits without reloading,
1476
but if reloading is needed, some other alternative will be used.
1477
@end table
1478
 
1479
@ifset INTERNALS
1480
When an insn pattern has multiple alternatives in its constraints, often
1481
the appearance of the assembler code is determined mostly by which
1482
alternative was matched.  When this is so, the C code for writing the
1483
assembler code can use the variable @code{which_alternative}, which is
1484
the ordinal number of the alternative that was actually satisfied (0 for
1485
the first, 1 for the second alternative, etc.).  @xref{Output Statement}.
1486
@end ifset
1487
 
1488
@ifset INTERNALS
1489
@node Class Preferences
1490
@subsection Register Class Preferences
1491
@cindex class preference constraints
1492
@cindex register class preference constraints
1493
 
1494
@cindex voting between constraint alternatives
1495
The operand constraints have another function: they enable the compiler
1496
to decide which kind of hardware register a pseudo register is best
1497
allocated to.  The compiler examines the constraints that apply to the
1498
insns that use the pseudo register, looking for the machine-dependent
1499
letters such as @samp{d} and @samp{a} that specify classes of registers.
1500
The pseudo register is put in whichever class gets the most ``votes''.
1501
The constraint letters @samp{g} and @samp{r} also vote: they vote in
1502
favor of a general register.  The machine description says which registers
1503
are considered general.
1504
 
1505
Of course, on some machines all registers are equivalent, and no register
1506
classes are defined.  Then none of this complexity is relevant.
1507
@end ifset
1508
 
1509
@node Modifiers
1510
@subsection Constraint Modifier Characters
1511
@cindex modifiers in constraints
1512
@cindex constraint modifier characters
1513
 
1514
@c prevent bad page break with this line
1515
Here are constraint modifier characters.
1516
 
1517
@table @samp
1518
@cindex @samp{=} in constraint
1519
@item =
1520
Means that this operand is write-only for this instruction: the previous
1521
value is discarded and replaced by output data.
1522
 
1523
@cindex @samp{+} in constraint
1524
@item +
1525
Means that this operand is both read and written by the instruction.
1526
 
1527
When the compiler fixes up the operands to satisfy the constraints,
1528
it needs to know which operands are inputs to the instruction and
1529
which are outputs from it.  @samp{=} identifies an output; @samp{+}
1530
identifies an operand that is both input and output; all other operands
1531
are assumed to be input only.
1532
 
1533
If you specify @samp{=} or @samp{+} in a constraint, you put it in the
1534
first character of the constraint string.
1535
 
1536
@cindex @samp{&} in constraint
1537
@cindex earlyclobber operand
1538
@item &
1539
Means (in a particular alternative) that this operand is an
1540
@dfn{earlyclobber} operand, which is modified before the instruction is
1541
finished using the input operands.  Therefore, this operand may not lie
1542
in a register that is used as an input operand or as part of any memory
1543
address.
1544
 
1545
@samp{&} applies only to the alternative in which it is written.  In
1546
constraints with multiple alternatives, sometimes one alternative
1547
requires @samp{&} while others do not.  See, for example, the
1548
@samp{movdf} insn of the 68000.
1549
 
1550
An input operand can be tied to an earlyclobber operand if its only
1551
use as an input occurs before the early result is written.  Adding
1552
alternatives of this form often allows GCC to produce better code
1553
when only some of the inputs can be affected by the earlyclobber.
1554
See, for example, the @samp{mulsi3} insn of the ARM@.
1555
 
1556
@samp{&} does not obviate the need to write @samp{=}.
1557
 
1558
@cindex @samp{%} in constraint
1559
@item %
1560
Declares the instruction to be commutative for this operand and the
1561
following operand.  This means that the compiler may interchange the
1562
two operands if that is the cheapest way to make all operands fit the
1563
constraints.
1564
@ifset INTERNALS
1565
This is often used in patterns for addition instructions
1566
that really have only two operands: the result must go in one of the
1567
arguments.  Here for example, is how the 68000 halfword-add
1568
instruction is defined:
1569
 
1570
@smallexample
1571
(define_insn "addhi3"
1572
  [(set (match_operand:HI 0 "general_operand" "=m,r")
1573
     (plus:HI (match_operand:HI 1 "general_operand" "%0,0")
1574
              (match_operand:HI 2 "general_operand" "di,g")))]
1575
  @dots{})
1576
@end smallexample
1577
@end ifset
1578
GCC can only handle one commutative pair in an asm; if you use more,
1579
the compiler may fail.  Note that you need not use the modifier if
1580
the two alternatives are strictly identical; this would only waste
1581
time in the reload pass.  The modifier is not operational after
1582
register allocation, so the result of @code{define_peephole2}
1583
and @code{define_split}s performed after reload cannot rely on
1584
@samp{%} to make the intended insn match.
1585
 
1586
@cindex @samp{#} in constraint
1587
@item #
1588
Says that all following characters, up to the next comma, are to be
1589
ignored as a constraint.  They are significant only for choosing
1590
register preferences.
1591
 
1592
@cindex @samp{*} in constraint
1593
@item *
1594
Says that the following character should be ignored when choosing
1595
register preferences.  @samp{*} has no effect on the meaning of the
1596
constraint as a constraint, and no effect on reloading.
1597
 
1598
@ifset INTERNALS
1599
Here is an example: the 68000 has an instruction to sign-extend a
1600
halfword in a data register, and can also sign-extend a value by
1601
copying it into an address register.  While either kind of register is
1602
acceptable, the constraints on an address-register destination are
1603
less strict, so it is best if register allocation makes an address
1604
register its goal.  Therefore, @samp{*} is used so that the @samp{d}
1605
constraint letter (for data register) is ignored when computing
1606
register preferences.
1607
 
1608
@smallexample
1609
(define_insn "extendhisi2"
1610
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=*d,a")
1611
        (sign_extend:SI
1612
         (match_operand:HI 1 "general_operand" "0,g")))]
1613
  @dots{})
1614
@end smallexample
1615
@end ifset
1616
@end table
1617
 
1618
@node Machine Constraints
1619
@subsection Constraints for Particular Machines
1620
@cindex machine specific constraints
1621
@cindex constraints, machine specific
1622
 
1623
Whenever possible, you should use the general-purpose constraint letters
1624
in @code{asm} arguments, since they will convey meaning more readily to
1625
people reading your code.  Failing that, use the constraint letters
1626
that usually have very similar meanings across architectures.  The most
1627
commonly used constraints are @samp{m} and @samp{r} (for memory and
1628
general-purpose registers respectively; @pxref{Simple Constraints}), and
1629
@samp{I}, usually the letter indicating the most common
1630
immediate-constant format.
1631
 
1632
Each architecture defines additional constraints.  These constraints
1633
are used by the compiler itself for instruction generation, as well as
1634
for @code{asm} statements; therefore, some of the constraints are not
1635
particularly useful for @code{asm}.  Here is a summary of some of the
1636
machine-dependent constraints available on some particular machines;
1637
it includes both constraints that are useful for @code{asm} and
1638
constraints that aren't.  The compiler source file mentioned in the
1639
table heading for each architecture is the definitive reference for
1640
the meanings of that architecture's constraints.
1641
 
1642
@table @emph
1643
@item ARM family---@file{config/arm/arm.h}
1644
@table @code
1645
@item f
1646
Floating-point register
1647
 
1648
@item w
1649
VFP floating-point register
1650
 
1651
@item F
1652
One of the floating-point constants 0.0, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0
1653
or 10.0
1654
 
1655
@item G
1656
Floating-point constant that would satisfy the constraint @samp{F} if it
1657
were negated
1658
 
1659
@item I
1660
Integer that is valid as an immediate operand in a data processing
1661
instruction.  That is, an integer in the range 0 to 255 rotated by a
1662
multiple of 2
1663
 
1664
@item J
1665
Integer in the range @minus{}4095 to 4095
1666
 
1667
@item K
1668
Integer that satisfies constraint @samp{I} when inverted (ones complement)
1669
 
1670
@item L
1671
Integer that satisfies constraint @samp{I} when negated (twos complement)
1672
 
1673
@item M
1674
Integer in the range 0 to 32
1675
 
1676
@item Q
1677
A memory reference where the exact address is in a single register
1678
(`@samp{m}' is preferable for @code{asm} statements)
1679
 
1680
@item R
1681
An item in the constant pool
1682
 
1683
@item S
1684
A symbol in the text segment of the current file
1685
 
1686
@item Uv
1687
A memory reference suitable for VFP load/store insns (reg+constant offset)
1688
 
1689
@item Uy
1690
A memory reference suitable for iWMMXt load/store instructions.
1691
 
1692
@item Uq
1693
A memory reference suitable for the ARMv4 ldrsb instruction.
1694
@end table
1695
 
1696
@item AVR family---@file{config/avr/constraints.md}
1697
@table @code
1698
@item l
1699
Registers from r0 to r15
1700
 
1701
@item a
1702
Registers from r16 to r23
1703
 
1704
@item d
1705
Registers from r16 to r31
1706
 
1707
@item w
1708
Registers from r24 to r31.  These registers can be used in @samp{adiw} command
1709
 
1710
@item e
1711
Pointer register (r26--r31)
1712
 
1713
@item b
1714
Base pointer register (r28--r31)
1715
 
1716
@item q
1717
Stack pointer register (SPH:SPL)
1718
 
1719
@item t
1720
Temporary register r0
1721
 
1722
@item x
1723
Register pair X (r27:r26)
1724
 
1725
@item y
1726
Register pair Y (r29:r28)
1727
 
1728
@item z
1729
Register pair Z (r31:r30)
1730
 
1731
@item I
1732
Constant greater than @minus{}1, less than 64
1733
 
1734
@item J
1735
Constant greater than @minus{}64, less than 1
1736
 
1737
@item K
1738
Constant integer 2
1739
 
1740
@item L
1741
Constant integer 0
1742
 
1743
@item M
1744
Constant that fits in 8 bits
1745
 
1746
@item N
1747
Constant integer @minus{}1
1748
 
1749
@item O
1750
Constant integer 8, 16, or 24
1751
 
1752
@item P
1753
Constant integer 1
1754
 
1755
@item G
1756
A floating point constant 0.0
1757
 
1758
@item R
1759
Integer constant in the range @minus{}6 @dots{} 5.
1760
 
1761
@item Q
1762
A memory address based on Y or Z pointer with displacement.
1763
@end table
1764
 
1765
@item CRX Architecture---@file{config/crx/crx.h}
1766
@table @code
1767
 
1768
@item b
1769
Registers from r0 to r14 (registers without stack pointer)
1770
 
1771
@item l
1772
Register r16 (64-bit accumulator lo register)
1773
 
1774
@item h
1775
Register r17 (64-bit accumulator hi register)
1776
 
1777
@item k
1778
Register pair r16-r17. (64-bit accumulator lo-hi pair)
1779
 
1780
@item I
1781
Constant that fits in 3 bits
1782
 
1783
@item J
1784
Constant that fits in 4 bits
1785
 
1786
@item K
1787
Constant that fits in 5 bits
1788
 
1789
@item L
1790
Constant that is one of @minus{}1, 4, @minus{}4, 7, 8, 12, 16, 20, 32, 48
1791
 
1792
@item G
1793
Floating point constant that is legal for store immediate
1794
@end table
1795
 
1796
@item Hewlett-Packard PA-RISC---@file{config/pa/pa.h}
1797
@table @code
1798
@item a
1799
General register 1
1800
 
1801
@item f
1802
Floating point register
1803
 
1804
@item q
1805
Shift amount register
1806
 
1807
@item x
1808
Floating point register (deprecated)
1809
 
1810
@item y
1811
Upper floating point register (32-bit), floating point register (64-bit)
1812
 
1813
@item Z
1814
Any register
1815
 
1816
@item I
1817
Signed 11-bit integer constant
1818
 
1819
@item J
1820
Signed 14-bit integer constant
1821
 
1822
@item K
1823
Integer constant that can be deposited with a @code{zdepi} instruction
1824
 
1825
@item L
1826
Signed 5-bit integer constant
1827
 
1828
@item M
1829
Integer constant 0
1830
 
1831
@item N
1832
Integer constant that can be loaded with a @code{ldil} instruction
1833
 
1834
@item O
1835
Integer constant whose value plus one is a power of 2
1836
 
1837
@item P
1838
Integer constant that can be used for @code{and} operations in @code{depi}
1839
and @code{extru} instructions
1840
 
1841
@item S
1842
Integer constant 31
1843
 
1844
@item U
1845
Integer constant 63
1846
 
1847
@item G
1848
Floating-point constant 0.0
1849
 
1850
@item A
1851
A @code{lo_sum} data-linkage-table memory operand
1852
 
1853
@item Q
1854
A memory operand that can be used as the destination operand of an
1855
integer store instruction
1856
 
1857
@item R
1858
A scaled or unscaled indexed memory operand
1859
 
1860
@item T
1861
A memory operand for floating-point loads and stores
1862
 
1863
@item W
1864
A register indirect memory operand
1865
@end table
1866
 
1867
@item picoChip family---@file{picochip.h}
1868
@table @code
1869
@item k
1870
Stack register.
1871
 
1872
@item f
1873
Pointer register.  A register which can be used to access memory without
1874
supplying an offset.  Any other register can be used to access memory,
1875
but will need a constant offset.  In the case of the offset being zero,
1876
it is more efficient to use a pointer register, since this reduces code
1877
size.
1878
 
1879
@item t
1880
A twin register.  A register which may be paired with an adjacent
1881
register to create a 32-bit register.
1882
 
1883
@item a
1884
Any absolute memory address (e.g., symbolic constant, symbolic
1885
constant + offset).
1886
 
1887
@item I
1888
4-bit signed integer.
1889
 
1890
@item J
1891
4-bit unsigned integer.
1892
 
1893
@item K
1894
8-bit signed integer.
1895
 
1896
@item M
1897
Any constant whose absolute value is no greater than 4-bits.
1898
 
1899
@item N
1900
10-bit signed integer
1901
 
1902
@item O
1903
16-bit signed integer.
1904
 
1905
@end table
1906
 
1907
@item PowerPC and IBM RS6000---@file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h}
1908
@table @code
1909
@item b
1910
Address base register
1911
 
1912
@item d
1913
Floating point register (containing 64-bit value)
1914
 
1915
@item f
1916
Floating point register (containing 32-bit value)
1917
 
1918
@item v
1919
Altivec vector register
1920
 
1921
@item wd
1922
VSX vector register to hold vector double data
1923
 
1924
@item wf
1925
VSX vector register to hold vector float data
1926
 
1927
@item ws
1928
VSX vector register to hold scalar float data
1929
 
1930
@item wa
1931
Any VSX register
1932
 
1933
@item h
1934
@samp{MQ}, @samp{CTR}, or @samp{LINK} register
1935
 
1936
@item q
1937
@samp{MQ} register
1938
 
1939
@item c
1940
@samp{CTR} register
1941
 
1942
@item l
1943
@samp{LINK} register
1944
 
1945
@item x
1946
@samp{CR} register (condition register) number 0
1947
 
1948
@item y
1949
@samp{CR} register (condition register)
1950
 
1951
@item z
1952
@samp{FPMEM} stack memory for FPR-GPR transfers
1953
 
1954
@item I
1955
Signed 16-bit constant
1956
 
1957
@item J
1958
Unsigned 16-bit constant shifted left 16 bits (use @samp{L} instead for
1959
@code{SImode} constants)
1960
 
1961
@item K
1962
Unsigned 16-bit constant
1963
 
1964
@item L
1965
Signed 16-bit constant shifted left 16 bits
1966
 
1967
@item M
1968
Constant larger than 31
1969
 
1970
@item N
1971
Exact power of 2
1972
 
1973
@item O
1974
Zero
1975
 
1976
@item P
1977
Constant whose negation is a signed 16-bit constant
1978
 
1979
@item G
1980
Floating point constant that can be loaded into a register with one
1981
instruction per word
1982
 
1983
@item H
1984
Integer/Floating point constant that can be loaded into a register using
1985
three instructions
1986
 
1987
@item m
1988
Memory operand.  Note that on PowerPC targets, @code{m} can include
1989
addresses that update the base register.  It is therefore only safe
1990
to use @samp{m} in an @code{asm} statement if that @code{asm} statement
1991
accesses the operand exactly once.  The @code{asm} statement must also
1992
use @samp{%U@var{<opno>}} as a placeholder for the ``update'' flag in the
1993
corresponding load or store instruction.  For example:
1994
 
1995
@smallexample
1996
asm ("st%U0 %1,%0" : "=m" (mem) : "r" (val));
1997
@end smallexample
1998
 
1999
is correct but:
2000
 
2001
@smallexample
2002
asm ("st %1,%0" : "=m" (mem) : "r" (val));
2003
@end smallexample
2004
 
2005
is not.  Use @code{es} rather than @code{m} if you don't want the
2006
base register to be updated.
2007
 
2008
@item es
2009
A ``stable'' memory operand; that is, one which does not include any
2010
automodification of the base register.  Unlike @samp{m}, this constraint
2011
can be used in @code{asm} statements that might access the operand
2012
several times, or that might not access it at all.
2013
 
2014
@item Q
2015
Memory operand that is an offset from a register (it is usually better
2016
to use @samp{m} or @samp{es} in @code{asm} statements)
2017
 
2018
@item Z
2019
Memory operand that is an indexed or indirect from a register (it is
2020
usually better to use @samp{m} or @samp{es} in @code{asm} statements)
2021
 
2022
@item R
2023
AIX TOC entry
2024
 
2025
@item a
2026
Address operand that is an indexed or indirect from a register (@samp{p} is
2027
preferable for @code{asm} statements)
2028
 
2029
@item S
2030
Constant suitable as a 64-bit mask operand
2031
 
2032
@item T
2033
Constant suitable as a 32-bit mask operand
2034
 
2035
@item U
2036
System V Release 4 small data area reference
2037
 
2038
@item t
2039
AND masks that can be performed by two rldic@{l, r@} instructions
2040
 
2041
@item W
2042
Vector constant that does not require memory
2043
 
2044
@item j
2045
Vector constant that is all zeros.
2046
 
2047
@end table
2048
 
2049
@item Intel 386---@file{config/i386/constraints.md}
2050
@table @code
2051
@item R
2052
Legacy register---the eight integer registers available on all
2053
i386 processors (@code{a}, @code{b}, @code{c}, @code{d},
2054
@code{si}, @code{di}, @code{bp}, @code{sp}).
2055
 
2056
@item q
2057
Any register accessible as @code{@var{r}l}.  In 32-bit mode, @code{a},
2058
@code{b}, @code{c}, and @code{d}; in 64-bit mode, any integer register.
2059
 
2060
@item Q
2061
Any register accessible as @code{@var{r}h}: @code{a}, @code{b},
2062
@code{c}, and @code{d}.
2063
 
2064
@ifset INTERNALS
2065
@item l
2066
Any register that can be used as the index in a base+index memory
2067
access: that is, any general register except the stack pointer.
2068
@end ifset
2069
 
2070
@item a
2071
The @code{a} register.
2072
 
2073
@item b
2074
The @code{b} register.
2075
 
2076
@item c
2077
The @code{c} register.
2078
 
2079
@item d
2080
The @code{d} register.
2081
 
2082
@item S
2083
The @code{si} register.
2084
 
2085
@item D
2086
The @code{di} register.
2087
 
2088
@item A
2089
The @code{a} and @code{d} registers, as a pair (for instructions that
2090
return half the result in one and half in the other).
2091
 
2092
@item f
2093
Any 80387 floating-point (stack) register.
2094
 
2095
@item t
2096
Top of 80387 floating-point stack (@code{%st(0)}).
2097
 
2098
@item u
2099
Second from top of 80387 floating-point stack (@code{%st(1)}).
2100
 
2101
@item y
2102
Any MMX register.
2103
 
2104
@item x
2105
Any SSE register.
2106
 
2107
@item Yz
2108
First SSE register (@code{%xmm0}).
2109
 
2110
@ifset INTERNALS
2111
@item Y2
2112
Any SSE register, when SSE2 is enabled.
2113
 
2114
@item Yi
2115
Any SSE register, when SSE2 and inter-unit moves are enabled.
2116
 
2117
@item Ym
2118
Any MMX register, when inter-unit moves are enabled.
2119
@end ifset
2120
 
2121
@item I
2122
Integer constant in the range 0 @dots{} 31, for 32-bit shifts.
2123
 
2124
@item J
2125
Integer constant in the range 0 @dots{} 63, for 64-bit shifts.
2126
 
2127
@item K
2128
Signed 8-bit integer constant.
2129
 
2130
@item L
2131
@code{0xFF} or @code{0xFFFF}, for andsi as a zero-extending move.
2132
 
2133
@item M
2134
0, 1, 2, or 3 (shifts for the @code{lea} instruction).
2135
 
2136
@item N
2137
Unsigned 8-bit integer constant (for @code{in} and @code{out}
2138
instructions).
2139
 
2140
@ifset INTERNALS
2141
@item O
2142
Integer constant in the range 0 @dots{} 127, for 128-bit shifts.
2143
@end ifset
2144
 
2145
@item G
2146
Standard 80387 floating point constant.
2147
 
2148
@item C
2149
Standard SSE floating point constant.
2150
 
2151
@item e
2152
32-bit signed integer constant, or a symbolic reference known
2153
to fit that range (for immediate operands in sign-extending x86-64
2154
instructions).
2155
 
2156
@item Z
2157
32-bit unsigned integer constant, or a symbolic reference known
2158
to fit that range (for immediate operands in zero-extending x86-64
2159
instructions).
2160
 
2161
@end table
2162
 
2163
@item Intel IA-64---@file{config/ia64/ia64.h}
2164
@table @code
2165
@item a
2166
General register @code{r0} to @code{r3} for @code{addl} instruction
2167
 
2168
@item b
2169
Branch register
2170
 
2171
@item c
2172
Predicate register (@samp{c} as in ``conditional'')
2173
 
2174
@item d
2175
Application register residing in M-unit
2176
 
2177
@item e
2178
Application register residing in I-unit
2179
 
2180
@item f
2181
Floating-point register
2182
 
2183
@item m
2184
Memory operand.
2185
Remember that @samp{m} allows postincrement and postdecrement which
2186
require printing with @samp{%Pn} on IA-64.
2187
Use @samp{S} to disallow postincrement and postdecrement.
2188
 
2189
@item G
2190
Floating-point constant 0.0 or 1.0
2191
 
2192
@item I
2193
14-bit signed integer constant
2194
 
2195
@item J
2196
22-bit signed integer constant
2197
 
2198
@item K
2199
8-bit signed integer constant for logical instructions
2200
 
2201
@item L
2202
8-bit adjusted signed integer constant for compare pseudo-ops
2203
 
2204
@item M
2205
6-bit unsigned integer constant for shift counts
2206
 
2207
@item N
2208
9-bit signed integer constant for load and store postincrements
2209
 
2210
@item O
2211
The constant zero
2212
 
2213
@item P
2214
 
2215
 
2216
@item Q
2217
Non-volatile memory for floating-point loads and stores
2218
 
2219
@item R
2220
Integer constant in the range 1 to 4 for @code{shladd} instruction
2221
 
2222
@item S
2223
Memory operand except postincrement and postdecrement
2224
@end table
2225
 
2226
@item FRV---@file{config/frv/frv.h}
2227
@table @code
2228
@item a
2229
Register in the class @code{ACC_REGS} (@code{acc0} to @code{acc7}).
2230
 
2231
@item b
2232
Register in the class @code{EVEN_ACC_REGS} (@code{acc0} to @code{acc7}).
2233
 
2234
@item c
2235
Register in the class @code{CC_REGS} (@code{fcc0} to @code{fcc3} and
2236
@code{icc0} to @code{icc3}).
2237
 
2238
@item d
2239
Register in the class @code{GPR_REGS} (@code{gr0} to @code{gr63}).
2240
 
2241
@item e
2242
Register in the class @code{EVEN_REGS} (@code{gr0} to @code{gr63}).
2243
Odd registers are excluded not in the class but through the use of a machine
2244
mode larger than 4 bytes.
2245
 
2246
@item f
2247
Register in the class @code{FPR_REGS} (@code{fr0} to @code{fr63}).
2248
 
2249
@item h
2250
Register in the class @code{FEVEN_REGS} (@code{fr0} to @code{fr63}).
2251
Odd registers are excluded not in the class but through the use of a machine
2252
mode larger than 4 bytes.
2253
 
2254
@item l
2255
Register in the class @code{LR_REG} (the @code{lr} register).
2256
 
2257
@item q
2258
Register in the class @code{QUAD_REGS} (@code{gr2} to @code{gr63}).
2259
Register numbers not divisible by 4 are excluded not in the class but through
2260
the use of a machine mode larger than 8 bytes.
2261
 
2262
@item t
2263
Register in the class @code{ICC_REGS} (@code{icc0} to @code{icc3}).
2264
 
2265
@item u
2266
Register in the class @code{FCC_REGS} (@code{fcc0} to @code{fcc3}).
2267
 
2268
@item v
2269
Register in the class @code{ICR_REGS} (@code{cc4} to @code{cc7}).
2270
 
2271
@item w
2272
Register in the class @code{FCR_REGS} (@code{cc0} to @code{cc3}).
2273
 
2274
@item x
2275
Register in the class @code{QUAD_FPR_REGS} (@code{fr0} to @code{fr63}).
2276
Register numbers not divisible by 4 are excluded not in the class but through
2277
the use of a machine mode larger than 8 bytes.
2278
 
2279
@item z
2280
Register in the class @code{SPR_REGS} (@code{lcr} and @code{lr}).
2281
 
2282
@item A
2283
Register in the class @code{QUAD_ACC_REGS} (@code{acc0} to @code{acc7}).
2284
 
2285
@item B
2286
Register in the class @code{ACCG_REGS} (@code{accg0} to @code{accg7}).
2287
 
2288
@item C
2289
Register in the class @code{CR_REGS} (@code{cc0} to @code{cc7}).
2290
 
2291
@item G
2292
Floating point constant zero
2293
 
2294
@item I
2295
6-bit signed integer constant
2296
 
2297
@item J
2298
10-bit signed integer constant
2299
 
2300
@item L
2301
16-bit signed integer constant
2302
 
2303
@item M
2304
16-bit unsigned integer constant
2305
 
2306
@item N
2307
12-bit signed integer constant that is negative---i.e.@: in the
2308
range of @minus{}2048 to @minus{}1
2309
 
2310
@item O
2311
Constant zero
2312
 
2313
@item P
2314
12-bit signed integer constant that is greater than zero---i.e.@: in the
2315
range of 1 to 2047.
2316
 
2317
@end table
2318
 
2319
@item Blackfin family---@file{config/bfin/constraints.md}
2320
@table @code
2321
@item a
2322
P register
2323
 
2324
@item d
2325
D register
2326
 
2327
@item z
2328
A call clobbered P register.
2329
 
2330
@item q@var{n}
2331
A single register.  If @var{n} is in the range 0 to 7, the corresponding D
2332
register.  If it is @code{A}, then the register P0.
2333
 
2334
@item D
2335
Even-numbered D register
2336
 
2337
@item W
2338
Odd-numbered D register
2339
 
2340
@item e
2341
Accumulator register.
2342
 
2343
@item A
2344
Even-numbered accumulator register.
2345
 
2346
@item B
2347
Odd-numbered accumulator register.
2348
 
2349
@item b
2350
I register
2351
 
2352
@item v
2353
B register
2354
 
2355
@item f
2356
M register
2357
 
2358
@item c
2359
Registers used for circular buffering, i.e. I, B, or L registers.
2360
 
2361
@item C
2362
The CC register.
2363
 
2364
@item t
2365
LT0 or LT1.
2366
 
2367
@item k
2368
LC0 or LC1.
2369
 
2370
@item u
2371
LB0 or LB1.
2372
 
2373
@item x
2374
Any D, P, B, M, I or L register.
2375
 
2376
@item y
2377
Additional registers typically used only in prologues and epilogues: RETS,
2378
RETN, RETI, RETX, RETE, ASTAT, SEQSTAT and USP.
2379
 
2380
@item w
2381
Any register except accumulators or CC.
2382
 
2383
@item Ksh
2384
Signed 16 bit integer (in the range @minus{}32768 to 32767)
2385
 
2386
@item Kuh
2387
Unsigned 16 bit integer (in the range 0 to 65535)
2388
 
2389
@item Ks7
2390
Signed 7 bit integer (in the range @minus{}64 to 63)
2391
 
2392
@item Ku7
2393
Unsigned 7 bit integer (in the range 0 to 127)
2394
 
2395
@item Ku5
2396
Unsigned 5 bit integer (in the range 0 to 31)
2397
 
2398
@item Ks4
2399
Signed 4 bit integer (in the range @minus{}8 to 7)
2400
 
2401
@item Ks3
2402
Signed 3 bit integer (in the range @minus{}3 to 4)
2403
 
2404
@item Ku3
2405
Unsigned 3 bit integer (in the range 0 to 7)
2406
 
2407
@item P@var{n}
2408
Constant @var{n}, where @var{n} is a single-digit constant in the range 0 to 4.
2409
 
2410
@item PA
2411
An integer equal to one of the MACFLAG_XXX constants that is suitable for
2412
use with either accumulator.
2413
 
2414
@item PB
2415
An integer equal to one of the MACFLAG_XXX constants that is suitable for
2416
use only with accumulator A1.
2417
 
2418
@item M1
2419
Constant 255.
2420
 
2421
@item M2
2422
Constant 65535.
2423
 
2424
@item J
2425
An integer constant with exactly a single bit set.
2426
 
2427
@item L
2428
An integer constant with all bits set except exactly one.
2429
 
2430
@item H
2431
 
2432
@item Q
2433
Any SYMBOL_REF.
2434
@end table
2435
 
2436
@item M32C---@file{config/m32c/m32c.c}
2437
@table @code
2438
@item Rsp
2439
@itemx Rfb
2440
@itemx Rsb
2441
@samp{$sp}, @samp{$fb}, @samp{$sb}.
2442
 
2443
@item Rcr
2444
Any control register, when they're 16 bits wide (nothing if control
2445
registers are 24 bits wide)
2446
 
2447
@item Rcl
2448
Any control register, when they're 24 bits wide.
2449
 
2450
@item R0w
2451
@itemx R1w
2452
@itemx R2w
2453
@itemx R3w
2454
$r0, $r1, $r2, $r3.
2455
 
2456
@item R02
2457
$r0 or $r2, or $r2r0 for 32 bit values.
2458
 
2459
@item R13
2460
$r1 or $r3, or $r3r1 for 32 bit values.
2461
 
2462
@item Rdi
2463
A register that can hold a 64 bit value.
2464
 
2465
@item Rhl
2466
$r0 or $r1 (registers with addressable high/low bytes)
2467
 
2468
@item R23
2469
$r2 or $r3
2470
 
2471
@item Raa
2472
Address registers
2473
 
2474
@item Raw
2475
Address registers when they're 16 bits wide.
2476
 
2477
@item Ral
2478
Address registers when they're 24 bits wide.
2479
 
2480
@item Rqi
2481
Registers that can hold QI values.
2482
 
2483
@item Rad
2484
Registers that can be used with displacements ($a0, $a1, $sb).
2485
 
2486
@item Rsi
2487
Registers that can hold 32 bit values.
2488
 
2489
@item Rhi
2490
Registers that can hold 16 bit values.
2491
 
2492
@item Rhc
2493
Registers chat can hold 16 bit values, including all control
2494
registers.
2495
 
2496
@item Rra
2497
$r0 through R1, plus $a0 and $a1.
2498
 
2499
@item Rfl
2500
The flags register.
2501
 
2502
@item Rmm
2503
The memory-based pseudo-registers $mem0 through $mem15.
2504
 
2505
@item Rpi
2506
Registers that can hold pointers (16 bit registers for r8c, m16c; 24
2507
bit registers for m32cm, m32c).
2508
 
2509
@item Rpa
2510
Matches multiple registers in a PARALLEL to form a larger register.
2511
Used to match function return values.
2512
 
2513
@item Is3
2514
@minus{}8 @dots{} 7
2515
 
2516
@item IS1
2517
@minus{}128 @dots{} 127
2518
 
2519
@item IS2
2520
@minus{}32768 @dots{} 32767
2521
 
2522
@item IU2
2523
 
2524
 
2525
@item In4
2526
@minus{}8 @dots{} @minus{}1 or 1 @dots{} 8
2527
 
2528
@item In5
2529
@minus{}16 @dots{} @minus{}1 or 1 @dots{} 16
2530
 
2531
@item In6
2532
@minus{}32 @dots{} @minus{}1 or 1 @dots{} 32
2533
 
2534
@item IM2
2535
@minus{}65536 @dots{} @minus{}1
2536
 
2537
@item Ilb
2538
An 8 bit value with exactly one bit set.
2539
 
2540
@item Ilw
2541
A 16 bit value with exactly one bit set.
2542
 
2543
@item Sd
2544
The common src/dest memory addressing modes.
2545
 
2546
@item Sa
2547
Memory addressed using $a0 or $a1.
2548
 
2549
@item Si
2550
Memory addressed with immediate addresses.
2551
 
2552
@item Ss
2553
Memory addressed using the stack pointer ($sp).
2554
 
2555
@item Sf
2556
Memory addressed using the frame base register ($fb).
2557
 
2558
@item Ss
2559
Memory addressed using the small base register ($sb).
2560
 
2561
@item S1
2562
$r1h
2563
@end table
2564
 
2565
@item MeP---@file{config/mep/constraints.md}
2566
@table @code
2567
 
2568
@item a
2569
The $sp register.
2570
 
2571
@item b
2572
The $tp register.
2573
 
2574
@item c
2575
Any control register.
2576
 
2577
@item d
2578
Either the $hi or the $lo register.
2579
 
2580
@item em
2581
Coprocessor registers that can be directly loaded ($c0-$c15).
2582
 
2583
@item ex
2584
Coprocessor registers that can be moved to each other.
2585
 
2586
@item er
2587
Coprocessor registers that can be moved to core registers.
2588
 
2589
@item h
2590
The $hi register.
2591
 
2592
@item j
2593
The $rpc register.
2594
 
2595
@item l
2596
The $lo register.
2597
 
2598
@item t
2599
Registers which can be used in $tp-relative addressing.
2600
 
2601
@item v
2602
The $gp register.
2603
 
2604
@item x
2605
The coprocessor registers.
2606
 
2607
@item y
2608
The coprocessor control registers.
2609
 
2610
@item z
2611
The $0 register.
2612
 
2613
@item A
2614
User-defined register set A.
2615
 
2616
@item B
2617
User-defined register set B.
2618
 
2619
@item C
2620
User-defined register set C.
2621
 
2622
@item D
2623
User-defined register set D.
2624
 
2625
@item I
2626
Offsets for $gp-rel addressing.
2627
 
2628
@item J
2629
Constants that can be used directly with boolean insns.
2630
 
2631
@item K
2632
Constants that can be moved directly to registers.
2633
 
2634
@item L
2635
Small constants that can be added to registers.
2636
 
2637
@item M
2638
Long shift counts.
2639
 
2640
@item N
2641
Small constants that can be compared to registers.
2642
 
2643
@item O
2644
Constants that can be loaded into the top half of registers.
2645
 
2646
@item S
2647
Signed 8-bit immediates.
2648
 
2649
@item T
2650
Symbols encoded for $tp-rel or $gp-rel addressing.
2651
 
2652
@item U
2653
Non-constant addresses for loading/saving coprocessor registers.
2654
 
2655
@item W
2656
The top half of a symbol's value.
2657
 
2658
@item Y
2659
A register indirect address without offset.
2660
 
2661
@item Z
2662
Symbolic references to the control bus.
2663
 
2664
 
2665
 
2666
@end table
2667
 
2668
@item MIPS---@file{config/mips/constraints.md}
2669
@table @code
2670
@item d
2671
An address register.  This is equivalent to @code{r} unless
2672
generating MIPS16 code.
2673
 
2674
@item f
2675
A floating-point register (if available).
2676
 
2677
@item h
2678
Formerly the @code{hi} register.  This constraint is no longer supported.
2679
 
2680
@item l
2681
The @code{lo} register.  Use this register to store values that are
2682
no bigger than a word.
2683
 
2684
@item x
2685
The concatenated @code{hi} and @code{lo} registers.  Use this register
2686
to store doubleword values.
2687
 
2688
@item c
2689
A register suitable for use in an indirect jump.  This will always be
2690
@code{$25} for @option{-mabicalls}.
2691
 
2692
@item v
2693
Register @code{$3}.  Do not use this constraint in new code;
2694
it is retained only for compatibility with glibc.
2695
 
2696
@item y
2697
Equivalent to @code{r}; retained for backwards compatibility.
2698
 
2699
@item z
2700
A floating-point condition code register.
2701
 
2702
@item I
2703
A signed 16-bit constant (for arithmetic instructions).
2704
 
2705
@item J
2706
Integer zero.
2707
 
2708
@item K
2709
An unsigned 16-bit constant (for logic instructions).
2710
 
2711
@item L
2712
A signed 32-bit constant in which the lower 16 bits are zero.
2713
Such constants can be loaded using @code{lui}.
2714
 
2715
@item M
2716
A constant that cannot be loaded using @code{lui}, @code{addiu}
2717
or @code{ori}.
2718
 
2719
@item N
2720
A constant in the range @minus{}65535 to @minus{}1 (inclusive).
2721
 
2722
@item O
2723
A signed 15-bit constant.
2724
 
2725
@item P
2726
A constant in the range 1 to 65535 (inclusive).
2727
 
2728
@item G
2729
Floating-point zero.
2730
 
2731
@item R
2732
An address that can be used in a non-macro load or store.
2733
@end table
2734
 
2735
@item Motorola 680x0---@file{config/m68k/constraints.md}
2736
@table @code
2737
@item a
2738
Address register
2739
 
2740
@item d
2741
Data register
2742
 
2743
@item f
2744
68881 floating-point register, if available
2745
 
2746
@item I
2747
Integer in the range 1 to 8
2748
 
2749
@item J
2750
16-bit signed number
2751
 
2752
@item K
2753
Signed number whose magnitude is greater than 0x80
2754
 
2755
@item L
2756
Integer in the range @minus{}8 to @minus{}1
2757
 
2758
@item M
2759
Signed number whose magnitude is greater than 0x100
2760
 
2761
@item N
2762
Range 24 to 31, rotatert:SI 8 to 1 expressed as rotate
2763
 
2764
@item O
2765
16 (for rotate using swap)
2766
 
2767
@item P
2768
Range 8 to 15, rotatert:HI 8 to 1 expressed as rotate
2769
 
2770
@item R
2771
Numbers that mov3q can handle
2772
 
2773
@item G
2774
Floating point constant that is not a 68881 constant
2775
 
2776
@item S
2777
Operands that satisfy 'm' when -mpcrel is in effect
2778
 
2779
@item T
2780
Operands that satisfy 's' when -mpcrel is not in effect
2781
 
2782
@item Q
2783
Address register indirect addressing mode
2784
 
2785
@item U
2786
Register offset addressing
2787
 
2788
@item W
2789
const_call_operand
2790
 
2791
@item Cs
2792
symbol_ref or const
2793
 
2794
@item Ci
2795
const_int
2796
 
2797
@item C0
2798
const_int 0
2799
 
2800
@item Cj
2801
Range of signed numbers that don't fit in 16 bits
2802
 
2803
@item Cmvq
2804
Integers valid for mvq
2805
 
2806
@item Capsw
2807
Integers valid for a moveq followed by a swap
2808
 
2809
@item Cmvz
2810
Integers valid for mvz
2811
 
2812
@item Cmvs
2813
Integers valid for mvs
2814
 
2815
@item Ap
2816
push_operand
2817
 
2818
@item Ac
2819
Non-register operands allowed in clr
2820
 
2821
@end table
2822
 
2823
@item Motorola 68HC11 & 68HC12 families---@file{config/m68hc11/m68hc11.h}
2824
@table @code
2825
@item a
2826
Register `a'
2827
 
2828
@item b
2829
Register `b'
2830
 
2831
@item d
2832
Register `d'
2833
 
2834
@item q
2835
An 8-bit register
2836
 
2837
@item t
2838
Temporary soft register _.tmp
2839
 
2840
@item u
2841
A soft register _.d1 to _.d31
2842
 
2843
@item w
2844
Stack pointer register
2845
 
2846
@item x
2847
Register `x'
2848
 
2849
@item y
2850
Register `y'
2851
 
2852
@item z
2853
Pseudo register `z' (replaced by `x' or `y' at the end)
2854
 
2855
@item A
2856
An address register: x, y or z
2857
 
2858
@item B
2859
An address register: x or y
2860
 
2861
@item D
2862
Register pair (x:d) to form a 32-bit value
2863
 
2864
@item L
2865
Constants in the range @minus{}65536 to 65535
2866
 
2867
@item M
2868
Constants whose 16-bit low part is zero
2869
 
2870
@item N
2871
Constant integer 1 or @minus{}1
2872
 
2873
@item O
2874
Constant integer 16
2875
 
2876
@item P
2877
Constants in the range @minus{}8 to 2
2878
 
2879
@end table
2880
 
2881
@item Moxie---@file{config/moxie/constraints.md}
2882
@table @code
2883
@item A
2884
An absolute address
2885
 
2886
@item B
2887
An offset address
2888
 
2889
@item W
2890
A register indirect memory operand
2891
 
2892
@item I
2893
A constant in the range of 0 to 255.
2894
 
2895
@item N
2896
A constant in the range of 0 to @minus{}255.
2897
 
2898
@end table
2899
 
2900
@item RX---@file{config/rx/constraints.md}
2901
@table @code
2902
@item Q
2903
An address which does not involve register indirect addressing or
2904
pre/post increment/decrement addressing.
2905
 
2906
@item Symbol
2907
A symbol reference.
2908
 
2909
@item Int08
2910
A constant in the range @minus{}256 to 255, inclusive.
2911
 
2912
@item Sint08
2913
A constant in the range @minus{}128 to 127, inclusive.
2914
 
2915
@item Sint16
2916
A constant in the range @minus{}32768 to 32767, inclusive.
2917
 
2918
@item Sint24
2919
A constant in the range @minus{}8388608 to 8388607, inclusive.
2920
 
2921
@item Uint04
2922
A constant in the range 0 to 15, inclusive.
2923
 
2924
@end table
2925
 
2926
@need 1000
2927
@item SPARC---@file{config/sparc/sparc.h}
2928
@table @code
2929
@item f
2930
Floating-point register on the SPARC-V8 architecture and
2931
lower floating-point register on the SPARC-V9 architecture.
2932
 
2933
@item e
2934
Floating-point register.  It is equivalent to @samp{f} on the
2935
SPARC-V8 architecture and contains both lower and upper
2936
floating-point registers on the SPARC-V9 architecture.
2937
 
2938
@item c
2939
Floating-point condition code register.
2940
 
2941
@item d
2942
Lower floating-point register.  It is only valid on the SPARC-V9
2943
architecture when the Visual Instruction Set is available.
2944
 
2945
@item b
2946
Floating-point register.  It is only valid on the SPARC-V9 architecture
2947
when the Visual Instruction Set is available.
2948
 
2949
@item h
2950
64-bit global or out register for the SPARC-V8+ architecture.
2951
 
2952
@item D
2953
A vector constant
2954
 
2955
@item I
2956
Signed 13-bit constant
2957
 
2958
@item J
2959
Zero
2960
 
2961
@item K
2962
32-bit constant with the low 12 bits clear (a constant that can be
2963
loaded with the @code{sethi} instruction)
2964
 
2965
@item L
2966
A constant in the range supported by @code{movcc} instructions
2967
 
2968
@item M
2969
A constant in the range supported by @code{movrcc} instructions
2970
 
2971
@item N
2972
Same as @samp{K}, except that it verifies that bits that are not in the
2973
lower 32-bit range are all zero.  Must be used instead of @samp{K} for
2974
modes wider than @code{SImode}
2975
 
2976
@item O
2977
The constant 4096
2978
 
2979
@item G
2980
Floating-point zero
2981
 
2982
@item H
2983
Signed 13-bit constant, sign-extended to 32 or 64 bits
2984
 
2985
@item Q
2986
Floating-point constant whose integral representation can
2987
be moved into an integer register using a single sethi
2988
instruction
2989
 
2990
@item R
2991
Floating-point constant whose integral representation can
2992
be moved into an integer register using a single mov
2993
instruction
2994
 
2995
@item S
2996
Floating-point constant whose integral representation can
2997
be moved into an integer register using a high/lo_sum
2998
instruction sequence
2999
 
3000
@item T
3001
Memory address aligned to an 8-byte boundary
3002
 
3003
@item U
3004
Even register
3005
 
3006
@item W
3007
Memory address for @samp{e} constraint registers
3008
 
3009
@item Y
3010
Vector zero
3011
 
3012
@end table
3013
 
3014
@item SPU---@file{config/spu/spu.h}
3015
@table @code
3016
@item a
3017
An immediate which can be loaded with the il/ila/ilh/ilhu instructions.  const_int is treated as a 64 bit value.
3018
 
3019
@item c
3020
An immediate for and/xor/or instructions.  const_int is treated as a 64 bit value.
3021
 
3022
@item d
3023
An immediate for the @code{iohl} instruction.  const_int is treated as a 64 bit value.
3024
 
3025
@item f
3026
An immediate which can be loaded with @code{fsmbi}.
3027
 
3028
@item A
3029
An immediate which can be loaded with the il/ila/ilh/ilhu instructions.  const_int is treated as a 32 bit value.
3030
 
3031
@item B
3032
An immediate for most arithmetic instructions.  const_int is treated as a 32 bit value.
3033
 
3034
@item C
3035
An immediate for and/xor/or instructions.  const_int is treated as a 32 bit value.
3036
 
3037
@item D
3038
An immediate for the @code{iohl} instruction.  const_int is treated as a 32 bit value.
3039
 
3040
@item I
3041
A constant in the range [@minus{}64, 63] for shift/rotate instructions.
3042
 
3043
@item J
3044
An unsigned 7-bit constant for conversion/nop/channel instructions.
3045
 
3046
@item K
3047
A signed 10-bit constant for most arithmetic instructions.
3048
 
3049
@item M
3050
A signed 16 bit immediate for @code{stop}.
3051
 
3052
@item N
3053
An unsigned 16-bit constant for @code{iohl} and @code{fsmbi}.
3054
 
3055
@item O
3056
An unsigned 7-bit constant whose 3 least significant bits are 0.
3057
 
3058
@item P
3059
An unsigned 3-bit constant for 16-byte rotates and shifts
3060
 
3061
@item R
3062
Call operand, reg, for indirect calls
3063
 
3064
@item S
3065
Call operand, symbol, for relative calls.
3066
 
3067
@item T
3068
Call operand, const_int, for absolute calls.
3069
 
3070
@item U
3071
An immediate which can be loaded with the il/ila/ilh/ilhu instructions.  const_int is sign extended to 128 bit.
3072
 
3073
@item W
3074
An immediate for shift and rotate instructions.  const_int is treated as a 32 bit value.
3075
 
3076
@item Y
3077
An immediate for and/xor/or instructions.  const_int is sign extended as a 128 bit.
3078
 
3079
@item Z
3080
An immediate for the @code{iohl} instruction.  const_int is sign extended to 128 bit.
3081
 
3082
@end table
3083
 
3084
@item S/390 and zSeries---@file{config/s390/s390.h}
3085
@table @code
3086
@item a
3087
Address register (general purpose register except r0)
3088
 
3089
@item c
3090
Condition code register
3091
 
3092
@item d
3093
Data register (arbitrary general purpose register)
3094
 
3095
@item f
3096
Floating-point register
3097
 
3098
@item I
3099
Unsigned 8-bit constant (0--255)
3100
 
3101
@item J
3102
Unsigned 12-bit constant (0--4095)
3103
 
3104
@item K
3105
Signed 16-bit constant (@minus{}32768--32767)
3106
 
3107
@item L
3108
Value appropriate as displacement.
3109
@table @code
3110
@item (0..4095)
3111
for short displacement
3112
@item (@minus{}524288..524287)
3113
for long displacement
3114
@end table
3115
 
3116
@item M
3117
Constant integer with a value of 0x7fffffff.
3118
 
3119
@item N
3120
Multiple letter constraint followed by 4 parameter letters.
3121
@table @code
3122
@item 0..9:
3123
number of the part counting from most to least significant
3124
@item H,Q:
3125
mode of the part
3126
@item D,S,H:
3127
mode of the containing operand
3128
@item 0,F:
3129
value of the other parts (F---all bits set)
3130
@end table
3131
The constraint matches if the specified part of a constant
3132
has a value different from its other parts.
3133
 
3134
@item Q
3135
Memory reference without index register and with short displacement.
3136
 
3137
@item R
3138
Memory reference with index register and short displacement.
3139
 
3140
@item S
3141
Memory reference without index register but with long displacement.
3142
 
3143
@item T
3144
Memory reference with index register and long displacement.
3145
 
3146
@item U
3147
Pointer with short displacement.
3148
 
3149
@item W
3150
Pointer with long displacement.
3151
 
3152
@item Y
3153
Shift count operand.
3154
 
3155
@end table
3156
 
3157
@item Score family---@file{config/score/score.h}
3158
@table @code
3159
@item d
3160
Registers from r0 to r32.
3161
 
3162
@item e
3163
Registers from r0 to r16.
3164
 
3165
@item t
3166
r8---r11 or r22---r27 registers.
3167
 
3168
@item h
3169
hi register.
3170
 
3171
@item l
3172
lo register.
3173
 
3174
@item x
3175
hi + lo register.
3176
 
3177
@item q
3178
cnt register.
3179
 
3180
@item y
3181
lcb register.
3182
 
3183
@item z
3184
scb register.
3185
 
3186
@item a
3187
cnt + lcb + scb register.
3188
 
3189
@item c
3190
cr0---cr15 register.
3191
 
3192
@item b
3193
cp1 registers.
3194
 
3195
@item f
3196
cp2 registers.
3197
 
3198
@item i
3199
cp3 registers.
3200
 
3201
@item j
3202
cp1 + cp2 + cp3 registers.
3203
 
3204
@item I
3205
High 16-bit constant (32-bit constant with 16 LSBs zero).
3206
 
3207
@item J
3208
Unsigned 5 bit integer (in the range 0 to 31).
3209
 
3210
@item K
3211
Unsigned 16 bit integer (in the range 0 to 65535).
3212
 
3213
@item L
3214
Signed 16 bit integer (in the range @minus{}32768 to 32767).
3215
 
3216
@item M
3217
Unsigned 14 bit integer (in the range 0 to 16383).
3218
 
3219
@item N
3220
Signed 14 bit integer (in the range @minus{}8192 to 8191).
3221
 
3222
@item Z
3223
Any SYMBOL_REF.
3224
@end table
3225
 
3226
@item Xstormy16---@file{config/stormy16/stormy16.h}
3227
@table @code
3228
@item a
3229
Register r0.
3230
 
3231
@item b
3232
Register r1.
3233
 
3234
@item c
3235
Register r2.
3236
 
3237
@item d
3238
Register r8.
3239
 
3240
@item e
3241
Registers r0 through r7.
3242
 
3243
@item t
3244
Registers r0 and r1.
3245
 
3246
@item y
3247
The carry register.
3248
 
3249
@item z
3250
Registers r8 and r9.
3251
 
3252
@item I
3253
A constant between 0 and 3 inclusive.
3254
 
3255
@item J
3256
A constant that has exactly one bit set.
3257
 
3258
@item K
3259
A constant that has exactly one bit clear.
3260
 
3261
@item L
3262
A constant between 0 and 255 inclusive.
3263
 
3264
@item M
3265
A constant between @minus{}255 and 0 inclusive.
3266
 
3267
@item N
3268
A constant between @minus{}3 and 0 inclusive.
3269
 
3270
@item O
3271
A constant between 1 and 4 inclusive.
3272
 
3273
@item P
3274
A constant between @minus{}4 and @minus{}1 inclusive.
3275
 
3276
@item Q
3277
A memory reference that is a stack push.
3278
 
3279
@item R
3280
A memory reference that is a stack pop.
3281
 
3282
@item S
3283
A memory reference that refers to a constant address of known value.
3284
 
3285
@item T
3286
The register indicated by Rx (not implemented yet).
3287
 
3288
@item U
3289
A constant that is not between 2 and 15 inclusive.
3290
 
3291
@item Z
3292
The constant 0.
3293
 
3294
@end table
3295
 
3296
@item Xtensa---@file{config/xtensa/constraints.md}
3297
@table @code
3298
@item a
3299
General-purpose 32-bit register
3300
 
3301
@item b
3302
One-bit boolean register
3303
 
3304
@item A
3305
MAC16 40-bit accumulator register
3306
 
3307
@item I
3308
Signed 12-bit integer constant, for use in MOVI instructions
3309
 
3310
@item J
3311
Signed 8-bit integer constant, for use in ADDI instructions
3312
 
3313
@item K
3314
Integer constant valid for BccI instructions
3315
 
3316
@item L
3317
Unsigned constant valid for BccUI instructions
3318
 
3319
@end table
3320
 
3321
@end table
3322
 
3323
@ifset INTERNALS
3324
@node Disable Insn Alternatives
3325
@subsection Disable insn alternatives using the @code{enabled} attribute
3326
@cindex enabled
3327
 
3328
The @code{enabled} insn attribute may be used to disable certain insn
3329
alternatives for machine-specific reasons.  This is useful when adding
3330
new instructions to an existing pattern which are only available for
3331
certain cpu architecture levels as specified with the @code{-march=}
3332
option.
3333
 
3334
If an insn alternative is disabled, then it will never be used.  The
3335
compiler treats the constraints for the disabled alternative as
3336
unsatisfiable.
3337
 
3338
In order to make use of the @code{enabled} attribute a back end has to add
3339
in the machine description files:
3340
 
3341
@enumerate
3342
@item
3343
A definition of the @code{enabled} insn attribute.  The attribute is
3344
defined as usual using the @code{define_attr} command.  This
3345
definition should be based on other insn attributes and/or target flags.
3346
The @code{enabled} attribute is a numeric attribute and should evaluate to
3347
@code{(const_int 1)} for an enabled alternative and to
3348
@code{(const_int 0)} otherwise.
3349
@item
3350
A definition of another insn attribute used to describe for what
3351
reason an insn alternative might be available or
3352
not.  E.g. @code{cpu_facility} as in the example below.
3353
@item
3354
An assignment for the second attribute to each insn definition
3355
combining instructions which are not all available under the same
3356
circumstances.  (Note: It obviously only makes sense for definitions
3357
with more than one alternative.  Otherwise the insn pattern should be
3358
disabled or enabled using the insn condition.)
3359
@end enumerate
3360
 
3361
E.g. the following two patterns could easily be merged using the @code{enabled}
3362
attribute:
3363
 
3364
@smallexample
3365
 
3366
(define_insn "*movdi_old"
3367
  [(set (match_operand:DI 0 "register_operand" "=d")
3368
        (match_operand:DI 1 "register_operand" " d"))]
3369
  "!TARGET_NEW"
3370
  "lgr %0,%1")
3371
 
3372
(define_insn "*movdi_new"
3373
  [(set (match_operand:DI 0 "register_operand" "=d,f,d")
3374
        (match_operand:DI 1 "register_operand" " d,d,f"))]
3375
  "TARGET_NEW"
3376
  "@@
3377
   lgr  %0,%1
3378
   ldgr %0,%1
3379
   lgdr %0,%1")
3380
 
3381
@end smallexample
3382
 
3383
to:
3384
 
3385
@smallexample
3386
 
3387
(define_insn "*movdi_combined"
3388
  [(set (match_operand:DI 0 "register_operand" "=d,f,d")
3389
        (match_operand:DI 1 "register_operand" " d,d,f"))]
3390
  ""
3391
  "@@
3392
   lgr  %0,%1
3393
   ldgr %0,%1
3394
   lgdr %0,%1"
3395
  [(set_attr "cpu_facility" "*,new,new")])
3396
 
3397
@end smallexample
3398
 
3399
with the @code{enabled} attribute defined like this:
3400
 
3401
@smallexample
3402
 
3403
(define_attr "cpu_facility" "standard,new" (const_string "standard"))
3404
 
3405
(define_attr "enabled" ""
3406
  (cond [(eq_attr "cpu_facility" "standard") (const_int 1)
3407
         (and (eq_attr "cpu_facility" "new")
3408
              (ne (symbol_ref "TARGET_NEW") (const_int 0)))
3409
         (const_int 1)]
3410
        (const_int 0)))
3411
 
3412
@end smallexample
3413
 
3414
@end ifset
3415
 
3416
@ifset INTERNALS
3417
@node Define Constraints
3418
@subsection Defining Machine-Specific Constraints
3419
@cindex defining constraints
3420
@cindex constraints, defining
3421
 
3422
Machine-specific constraints fall into two categories: register and
3423
non-register constraints.  Within the latter category, constraints
3424
which allow subsets of all possible memory or address operands should
3425
be specially marked, to give @code{reload} more information.
3426
 
3427
Machine-specific constraints can be given names of arbitrary length,
3428
but they must be entirely composed of letters, digits, underscores
3429
(@samp{_}), and angle brackets (@samp{< >}).  Like C identifiers, they
3430
must begin with a letter or underscore.
3431
 
3432
In order to avoid ambiguity in operand constraint strings, no
3433
constraint can have a name that begins with any other constraint's
3434
name.  For example, if @code{x} is defined as a constraint name,
3435
@code{xy} may not be, and vice versa.  As a consequence of this rule,
3436
no constraint may begin with one of the generic constraint letters:
3437
@samp{E F V X g i m n o p r s}.
3438
 
3439
Register constraints correspond directly to register classes.
3440
@xref{Register Classes}.  There is thus not much flexibility in their
3441
definitions.
3442
 
3443
@deffn {MD Expression} define_register_constraint name regclass docstring
3444
All three arguments are string constants.
3445
@var{name} is the name of the constraint, as it will appear in
3446
@code{match_operand} expressions.  If @var{name} is a multi-letter
3447
constraint its length shall be the same for all constraints starting
3448
with the same letter.  @var{regclass} can be either the
3449
name of the corresponding register class (@pxref{Register Classes}),
3450
or a C expression which evaluates to the appropriate register class.
3451
If it is an expression, it must have no side effects, and it cannot
3452
look at the operand.  The usual use of expressions is to map some
3453
register constraints to @code{NO_REGS} when the register class
3454
is not available on a given subarchitecture.
3455
 
3456
@var{docstring} is a sentence documenting the meaning of the
3457
constraint.  Docstrings are explained further below.
3458
@end deffn
3459
 
3460
Non-register constraints are more like predicates: the constraint
3461
definition gives a Boolean expression which indicates whether the
3462
constraint matches.
3463
 
3464
@deffn {MD Expression} define_constraint name docstring exp
3465
The @var{name} and @var{docstring} arguments are the same as for
3466
@code{define_register_constraint}, but note that the docstring comes
3467
immediately after the name for these expressions.  @var{exp} is an RTL
3468
expression, obeying the same rules as the RTL expressions in predicate
3469
definitions.  @xref{Defining Predicates}, for details.  If it
3470
evaluates true, the constraint matches; if it evaluates false, it
3471
doesn't. Constraint expressions should indicate which RTL codes they
3472
might match, just like predicate expressions.
3473
 
3474
@code{match_test} C expressions have access to the
3475
following variables:
3476
 
3477
@table @var
3478
@item op
3479
The RTL object defining the operand.
3480
@item mode
3481
The machine mode of @var{op}.
3482
@item ival
3483
@samp{INTVAL (@var{op})}, if @var{op} is a @code{const_int}.
3484
@item hval
3485
@samp{CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (@var{op})}, if @var{op} is an integer
3486
@code{const_double}.
3487
@item lval
3488
@samp{CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (@var{op})}, if @var{op} is an integer
3489
@code{const_double}.
3490
@item rval
3491
@samp{CONST_DOUBLE_REAL_VALUE (@var{op})}, if @var{op} is a floating-point
3492
@code{const_double}.
3493
@end table
3494
 
3495
The @var{*val} variables should only be used once another piece of the
3496
expression has verified that @var{op} is the appropriate kind of RTL
3497
object.
3498
@end deffn
3499
 
3500
Most non-register constraints should be defined with
3501
@code{define_constraint}.  The remaining two definition expressions
3502
are only appropriate for constraints that should be handled specially
3503
by @code{reload} if they fail to match.
3504
 
3505
@deffn {MD Expression} define_memory_constraint name docstring exp
3506
Use this expression for constraints that match a subset of all memory
3507
operands: that is, @code{reload} can make them match by converting the
3508
operand to the form @samp{@w{(mem (reg @var{X}))}}, where @var{X} is a
3509
base register (from the register class specified by
3510
@code{BASE_REG_CLASS}, @pxref{Register Classes}).
3511
 
3512
For example, on the S/390, some instructions do not accept arbitrary
3513
memory references, but only those that do not make use of an index
3514
register.  The constraint letter @samp{Q} is defined to represent a
3515
memory address of this type.  If @samp{Q} is defined with
3516
@code{define_memory_constraint}, a @samp{Q} constraint can handle any
3517
memory operand, because @code{reload} knows it can simply copy the
3518
memory address into a base register if required.  This is analogous to
3519
the way an @samp{o} constraint can handle any memory operand.
3520
 
3521
The syntax and semantics are otherwise identical to
3522
@code{define_constraint}.
3523
@end deffn
3524
 
3525
@deffn {MD Expression} define_address_constraint name docstring exp
3526
Use this expression for constraints that match a subset of all address
3527
operands: that is, @code{reload} can make the constraint match by
3528
converting the operand to the form @samp{@w{(reg @var{X})}}, again
3529
with @var{X} a base register.
3530
 
3531
Constraints defined with @code{define_address_constraint} can only be
3532
used with the @code{address_operand} predicate, or machine-specific
3533
predicates that work the same way.  They are treated analogously to
3534
the generic @samp{p} constraint.
3535
 
3536
The syntax and semantics are otherwise identical to
3537
@code{define_constraint}.
3538
@end deffn
3539
 
3540
For historical reasons, names beginning with the letters @samp{G H}
3541
are reserved for constraints that match only @code{const_double}s, and
3542
names beginning with the letters @samp{I J K L M N O P} are reserved
3543
for constraints that match only @code{const_int}s.  This may change in
3544
the future.  For the time being, constraints with these names must be
3545
written in a stylized form, so that @code{genpreds} can tell you did
3546
it correctly:
3547
 
3548
@smallexample
3549
@group
3550
(define_constraint "[@var{GHIJKLMNOP}]@dots{}"
3551
  "@var{doc}@dots{}"
3552
  (and (match_code "const_int")  ; @r{@code{const_double} for G/H}
3553
       @var{condition}@dots{}))            ; @r{usually a @code{match_test}}
3554
@end group
3555
@end smallexample
3556
@c the semicolons line up in the formatted manual
3557
 
3558
It is fine to use names beginning with other letters for constraints
3559
that match @code{const_double}s or @code{const_int}s.
3560
 
3561
Each docstring in a constraint definition should be one or more complete
3562
sentences, marked up in Texinfo format.  @emph{They are currently unused.}
3563
In the future they will be copied into the GCC manual, in @ref{Machine
3564
Constraints}, replacing the hand-maintained tables currently found in
3565
that section.  Also, in the future the compiler may use this to give
3566
more helpful diagnostics when poor choice of @code{asm} constraints
3567
causes a reload failure.
3568
 
3569
If you put the pseudo-Texinfo directive @samp{@@internal} at the
3570
beginning of a docstring, then (in the future) it will appear only in
3571
the internals manual's version of the machine-specific constraint tables.
3572
Use this for constraints that should not appear in @code{asm} statements.
3573
 
3574
@node C Constraint Interface
3575
@subsection Testing constraints from C
3576
@cindex testing constraints
3577
@cindex constraints, testing
3578
 
3579
It is occasionally useful to test a constraint from C code rather than
3580
implicitly via the constraint string in a @code{match_operand}.  The
3581
generated file @file{tm_p.h} declares a few interfaces for working
3582
with machine-specific constraints.  None of these interfaces work with
3583
the generic constraints described in @ref{Simple Constraints}.  This
3584
may change in the future.
3585
 
3586
@strong{Warning:} @file{tm_p.h} may declare other functions that
3587
operate on constraints, besides the ones documented here.  Do not use
3588
those functions from machine-dependent code.  They exist to implement
3589
the old constraint interface that machine-independent components of
3590
the compiler still expect.  They will change or disappear in the
3591
future.
3592
 
3593
Some valid constraint names are not valid C identifiers, so there is a
3594
mangling scheme for referring to them from C@.  Constraint names that
3595
do not contain angle brackets or underscores are left unchanged.
3596
Underscores are doubled, each @samp{<} is replaced with @samp{_l}, and
3597
each @samp{>} with @samp{_g}.  Here are some examples:
3598
 
3599
@c the @c's prevent double blank lines in the printed manual.
3600
@example
3601
@multitable {Original} {Mangled}
3602
@item @strong{Original} @tab @strong{Mangled}  @c
3603
@item @code{x}     @tab @code{x}       @c
3604
@item @code{P42x}  @tab @code{P42x}    @c
3605
@item @code{P4_x}  @tab @code{P4__x}   @c
3606
@item @code{P4>x}  @tab @code{P4_gx}   @c
3607
@item @code{P4>>}  @tab @code{P4_g_g}  @c
3608
@item @code{P4_g>} @tab @code{P4__g_g} @c
3609
@end multitable
3610
@end example
3611
 
3612
Throughout this section, the variable @var{c} is either a constraint
3613
in the abstract sense, or a constant from @code{enum constraint_num};
3614
the variable @var{m} is a mangled constraint name (usually as part of
3615
a larger identifier).
3616
 
3617
@deftp Enum constraint_num
3618
For each machine-specific constraint, there is a corresponding
3619
enumeration constant: @samp{CONSTRAINT_} plus the mangled name of the
3620
constraint.  Functions that take an @code{enum constraint_num} as an
3621
argument expect one of these constants.
3622
 
3623
Machine-independent constraints do not have associated constants.
3624
This may change in the future.
3625
@end deftp
3626
 
3627
@deftypefun {inline bool} satisfies_constraint_@var{m} (rtx @var{exp})
3628
For each machine-specific, non-register constraint @var{m}, there is
3629
one of these functions; it returns @code{true} if @var{exp} satisfies the
3630
constraint.  These functions are only visible if @file{rtl.h} was included
3631
before @file{tm_p.h}.
3632
@end deftypefun
3633
 
3634
@deftypefun bool constraint_satisfied_p (rtx @var{exp}, enum constraint_num @var{c})
3635
Like the @code{satisfies_constraint_@var{m}} functions, but the
3636
constraint to test is given as an argument, @var{c}.  If @var{c}
3637
specifies a register constraint, this function will always return
3638
@code{false}.
3639
@end deftypefun
3640
 
3641
@deftypefun {enum reg_class} regclass_for_constraint (enum constraint_num @var{c})
3642
Returns the register class associated with @var{c}.  If @var{c} is not
3643
a register constraint, or those registers are not available for the
3644
currently selected subtarget, returns @code{NO_REGS}.
3645
@end deftypefun
3646
 
3647
Here is an example use of @code{satisfies_constraint_@var{m}}.  In
3648
peephole optimizations (@pxref{Peephole Definitions}), operand
3649
constraint strings are ignored, so if there are relevant constraints,
3650
they must be tested in the C condition.  In the example, the
3651
optimization is applied if operand 2 does @emph{not} satisfy the
3652
@samp{K} constraint.  (This is a simplified version of a peephole
3653
definition from the i386 machine description.)
3654
 
3655
@smallexample
3656
(define_peephole2
3657
  [(match_scratch:SI 3 "r")
3658
   (set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "")
3659
        (mult:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "memory_operand" "")
3660
                 (match_operand:SI 2 "immediate_operand" "")))]
3661
 
3662
  "!satisfies_constraint_K (operands[2])"
3663
 
3664
  [(set (match_dup 3) (match_dup 1))
3665
   (set (match_dup 0) (mult:SI (match_dup 3) (match_dup 2)))]
3666
 
3667
  "")
3668
@end smallexample
3669
 
3670
@node Standard Names
3671
@section Standard Pattern Names For Generation
3672
@cindex standard pattern names
3673
@cindex pattern names
3674
@cindex names, pattern
3675
 
3676
Here is a table of the instruction names that are meaningful in the RTL
3677
generation pass of the compiler.  Giving one of these names to an
3678
instruction pattern tells the RTL generation pass that it can use the
3679
pattern to accomplish a certain task.
3680
 
3681
@table @asis
3682
@cindex @code{mov@var{m}} instruction pattern
3683
@item @samp{mov@var{m}}
3684
Here @var{m} stands for a two-letter machine mode name, in lowercase.
3685
This instruction pattern moves data with that machine mode from operand
3686
1 to operand 0.  For example, @samp{movsi} moves full-word data.
3687
 
3688
If operand 0 is a @code{subreg} with mode @var{m} of a register whose
3689
own mode is wider than @var{m}, the effect of this instruction is
3690
to store the specified value in the part of the register that corresponds
3691
to mode @var{m}.  Bits outside of @var{m}, but which are within the
3692
same target word as the @code{subreg} are undefined.  Bits which are
3693
outside the target word are left unchanged.
3694
 
3695
This class of patterns is special in several ways.  First of all, each
3696
of these names up to and including full word size @emph{must} be defined,
3697
because there is no other way to copy a datum from one place to another.
3698
If there are patterns accepting operands in larger modes,
3699
@samp{mov@var{m}} must be defined for integer modes of those sizes.
3700
 
3701
Second, these patterns are not used solely in the RTL generation pass.
3702
Even the reload pass can generate move insns to copy values from stack
3703
slots into temporary registers.  When it does so, one of the operands is
3704
a hard register and the other is an operand that can need to be reloaded
3705
into a register.
3706
 
3707
@findex force_reg
3708
Therefore, when given such a pair of operands, the pattern must generate
3709
RTL which needs no reloading and needs no temporary registers---no
3710
registers other than the operands.  For example, if you support the
3711
pattern with a @code{define_expand}, then in such a case the
3712
@code{define_expand} mustn't call @code{force_reg} or any other such
3713
function which might generate new pseudo registers.
3714
 
3715
This requirement exists even for subword modes on a RISC machine where
3716
fetching those modes from memory normally requires several insns and
3717
some temporary registers.
3718
 
3719
@findex change_address
3720
During reload a memory reference with an invalid address may be passed
3721
as an operand.  Such an address will be replaced with a valid address
3722
later in the reload pass.  In this case, nothing may be done with the
3723
address except to use it as it stands.  If it is copied, it will not be
3724
replaced with a valid address.  No attempt should be made to make such
3725
an address into a valid address and no routine (such as
3726
@code{change_address}) that will do so may be called.  Note that
3727
@code{general_operand} will fail when applied to such an address.
3728
 
3729
@findex reload_in_progress
3730
The global variable @code{reload_in_progress} (which must be explicitly
3731
declared if required) can be used to determine whether such special
3732
handling is required.
3733
 
3734
The variety of operands that have reloads depends on the rest of the
3735
machine description, but typically on a RISC machine these can only be
3736
pseudo registers that did not get hard registers, while on other
3737
machines explicit memory references will get optional reloads.
3738
 
3739
If a scratch register is required to move an object to or from memory,
3740
it can be allocated using @code{gen_reg_rtx} prior to life analysis.
3741
 
3742
If there are cases which need scratch registers during or after reload,
3743
you must provide an appropriate secondary_reload target hook.
3744
 
3745
@findex can_create_pseudo_p
3746
The macro @code{can_create_pseudo_p} can be used to determine if it
3747
is unsafe to create new pseudo registers.  If this variable is nonzero, then
3748
it is unsafe to call @code{gen_reg_rtx} to allocate a new pseudo.
3749
 
3750
The constraints on a @samp{mov@var{m}} must permit moving any hard
3751
register to any other hard register provided that
3752
@code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} permits mode @var{m} in both registers and
3753
@code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their classes returns a value of 2.
3754
 
3755
It is obligatory to support floating point @samp{mov@var{m}}
3756
instructions into and out of any registers that can hold fixed point
3757
values, because unions and structures (which have modes @code{SImode} or
3758
@code{DImode}) can be in those registers and they may have floating
3759
point members.
3760
 
3761
There may also be a need to support fixed point @samp{mov@var{m}}
3762
instructions in and out of floating point registers.  Unfortunately, I
3763
have forgotten why this was so, and I don't know whether it is still
3764
true.  If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} rejects fixed point values in
3765
floating point registers, then the constraints of the fixed point
3766
@samp{mov@var{m}} instructions must be designed to avoid ever trying to
3767
reload into a floating point register.
3768
 
3769
@cindex @code{reload_in} instruction pattern
3770
@cindex @code{reload_out} instruction pattern
3771
@item @samp{reload_in@var{m}}
3772
@itemx @samp{reload_out@var{m}}
3773
These named patterns have been obsoleted by the target hook
3774
@code{secondary_reload}.
3775
 
3776
Like @samp{mov@var{m}}, but used when a scratch register is required to
3777
move between operand 0 and operand 1.  Operand 2 describes the scratch
3778
register.  See the discussion of the @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS}
3779
macro in @pxref{Register Classes}.
3780
 
3781
There are special restrictions on the form of the @code{match_operand}s
3782
used in these patterns.  First, only the predicate for the reload
3783
operand is examined, i.e., @code{reload_in} examines operand 1, but not
3784
the predicates for operand 0 or 2.  Second, there may be only one
3785
alternative in the constraints.  Third, only a single register class
3786
letter may be used for the constraint; subsequent constraint letters
3787
are ignored.  As a special exception, an empty constraint string
3788
matches the @code{ALL_REGS} register class.  This may relieve ports
3789
of the burden of defining an @code{ALL_REGS} constraint letter just
3790
for these patterns.
3791
 
3792
@cindex @code{movstrict@var{m}} instruction pattern
3793
@item @samp{movstrict@var{m}}
3794
Like @samp{mov@var{m}} except that if operand 0 is a @code{subreg}
3795
with mode @var{m} of a register whose natural mode is wider,
3796
the @samp{movstrict@var{m}} instruction is guaranteed not to alter
3797
any of the register except the part which belongs to mode @var{m}.
3798
 
3799
@cindex @code{movmisalign@var{m}} instruction pattern
3800
@item @samp{movmisalign@var{m}}
3801
This variant of a move pattern is designed to load or store a value
3802
from a memory address that is not naturally aligned for its mode.
3803
For a store, the memory will be in operand 0; for a load, the memory
3804
will be in operand 1.  The other operand is guaranteed not to be a
3805
memory, so that it's easy to tell whether this is a load or store.
3806
 
3807
This pattern is used by the autovectorizer, and when expanding a
3808
@code{MISALIGNED_INDIRECT_REF} expression.
3809
 
3810
@cindex @code{load_multiple} instruction pattern
3811
@item @samp{load_multiple}
3812
Load several consecutive memory locations into consecutive registers.
3813
Operand 0 is the first of the consecutive registers, operand 1
3814
is the first memory location, and operand 2 is a constant: the
3815
number of consecutive registers.
3816
 
3817
Define this only if the target machine really has such an instruction;
3818
do not define this if the most efficient way of loading consecutive
3819
registers from memory is to do them one at a time.
3820
 
3821
On some machines, there are restrictions as to which consecutive
3822
registers can be stored into memory, such as particular starting or
3823
ending register numbers or only a range of valid counts.  For those
3824
machines, use a @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions})
3825
and make the pattern fail if the restrictions are not met.
3826
 
3827
Write the generated insn as a @code{parallel} with elements being a
3828
@code{set} of one register from the appropriate memory location (you may
3829
also need @code{use} or @code{clobber} elements).  Use a
3830
@code{match_parallel} (@pxref{RTL Template}) to recognize the insn.  See
3831
@file{rs6000.md} for examples of the use of this insn pattern.
3832
 
3833
@cindex @samp{store_multiple} instruction pattern
3834
@item @samp{store_multiple}
3835
Similar to @samp{load_multiple}, but store several consecutive registers
3836
into consecutive memory locations.  Operand 0 is the first of the
3837
consecutive memory locations, operand 1 is the first register, and
3838
operand 2 is a constant: the number of consecutive registers.
3839
 
3840
@cindex @code{vec_set@var{m}} instruction pattern
3841
@item @samp{vec_set@var{m}}
3842
Set given field in the vector value.  Operand 0 is the vector to modify,
3843
operand 1 is new value of field and operand 2 specify the field index.
3844
 
3845
@cindex @code{vec_extract@var{m}} instruction pattern
3846
@item @samp{vec_extract@var{m}}
3847
Extract given field from the vector value.  Operand 1 is the vector, operand 2
3848
specify field index and operand 0 place to store value into.
3849
 
3850
@cindex @code{vec_extract_even@var{m}} instruction pattern
3851
@item @samp{vec_extract_even@var{m}}
3852
Extract even elements from the input vectors (operand 1 and operand 2).
3853
The even elements of operand 2 are concatenated to the even elements of operand
3854
1 in their original order. The result is stored in operand 0.
3855
The output and input vectors should have the same modes.
3856
 
3857
@cindex @code{vec_extract_odd@var{m}} instruction pattern
3858
@item @samp{vec_extract_odd@var{m}}
3859
Extract odd elements from the input vectors (operand 1 and operand 2).
3860
The odd elements of operand 2 are concatenated to the odd elements of operand
3861
1 in their original order. The result is stored in operand 0.
3862
The output and input vectors should have the same modes.
3863
 
3864
@cindex @code{vec_interleave_high@var{m}} instruction pattern
3865
@item @samp{vec_interleave_high@var{m}}
3866
Merge high elements of the two input vectors into the output vector. The output
3867
and input vectors should have the same modes (@code{N} elements). The high
3868
@code{N/2} elements of the first input vector are interleaved with the high
3869
@code{N/2} elements of the second input vector.
3870
 
3871
@cindex @code{vec_interleave_low@var{m}} instruction pattern
3872
@item @samp{vec_interleave_low@var{m}}
3873
Merge low elements of the two input vectors into the output vector. The output
3874
and input vectors should have the same modes (@code{N} elements). The low
3875
@code{N/2} elements of the first input vector are interleaved with the low
3876
@code{N/2} elements of the second input vector.
3877
 
3878
@cindex @code{vec_init@var{m}} instruction pattern
3879
@item @samp{vec_init@var{m}}
3880
Initialize the vector to given values.  Operand 0 is the vector to initialize
3881
and operand 1 is parallel containing values for individual fields.
3882
 
3883
@cindex @code{push@var{m}1} instruction pattern
3884
@item @samp{push@var{m}1}
3885
Output a push instruction.  Operand 0 is value to push.  Used only when
3886
@code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is defined.  For historical reason, this pattern may be
3887
missing and in such case an @code{mov} expander is used instead, with a
3888
@code{MEM} expression forming the push operation.  The @code{mov} expander
3889
method is deprecated.
3890
 
3891
@cindex @code{add@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3892
@item @samp{add@var{m}3}
3893
Add operand 2 and operand 1, storing the result in operand 0.  All operands
3894
must have mode @var{m}.  This can be used even on two-address machines, by
3895
means of constraints requiring operands 1 and 0 to be the same location.
3896
 
3897
@cindex @code{ssadd@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3898
@cindex @code{usadd@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3899
@cindex @code{sub@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3900
@cindex @code{sssub@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3901
@cindex @code{ussub@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3902
@cindex @code{mul@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3903
@cindex @code{ssmul@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3904
@cindex @code{usmul@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3905
@cindex @code{div@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3906
@cindex @code{ssdiv@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3907
@cindex @code{udiv@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3908
@cindex @code{usdiv@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3909
@cindex @code{mod@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3910
@cindex @code{umod@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3911
@cindex @code{umin@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3912
@cindex @code{umax@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3913
@cindex @code{and@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3914
@cindex @code{ior@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3915
@cindex @code{xor@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3916
@item @samp{ssadd@var{m}3}, @samp{usadd@var{m}3}
3917
@item @samp{sub@var{m}3}, @samp{sssub@var{m}3}, @samp{ussub@var{m}3}
3918
@item @samp{mul@var{m}3}, @samp{ssmul@var{m}3}, @samp{usmul@var{m}3}
3919
@itemx @samp{div@var{m}3}, @samp{ssdiv@var{m}3}
3920
@itemx @samp{udiv@var{m}3}, @samp{usdiv@var{m}3}
3921
@itemx @samp{mod@var{m}3}, @samp{umod@var{m}3}
3922
@itemx @samp{umin@var{m}3}, @samp{umax@var{m}3}
3923
@itemx @samp{and@var{m}3}, @samp{ior@var{m}3}, @samp{xor@var{m}3}
3924
Similar, for other arithmetic operations.
3925
 
3926
@cindex @code{min@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3927
@cindex @code{max@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3928
@item @samp{smin@var{m}3}, @samp{smax@var{m}3}
3929
Signed minimum and maximum operations.  When used with floating point,
3930
if both operands are zeros, or if either operand is @code{NaN}, then
3931
it is unspecified which of the two operands is returned as the result.
3932
 
3933
@cindex @code{reduc_smin_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3934
@cindex @code{reduc_smax_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3935
@item @samp{reduc_smin_@var{m}}, @samp{reduc_smax_@var{m}}
3936
Find the signed minimum/maximum of the elements of a vector. The vector is
3937
operand 1, and the scalar result is stored in the least significant bits of
3938
operand 0 (also a vector). The output and input vector should have the same
3939
modes.
3940
 
3941
@cindex @code{reduc_umin_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3942
@cindex @code{reduc_umax_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3943
@item @samp{reduc_umin_@var{m}}, @samp{reduc_umax_@var{m}}
3944
Find the unsigned minimum/maximum of the elements of a vector. The vector is
3945
operand 1, and the scalar result is stored in the least significant bits of
3946
operand 0 (also a vector). The output and input vector should have the same
3947
modes.
3948
 
3949
@cindex @code{reduc_splus_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3950
@item @samp{reduc_splus_@var{m}}
3951
Compute the sum of the signed elements of a vector. The vector is operand 1,
3952
and the scalar result is stored in the least significant bits of operand 0
3953
(also a vector). The output and input vector should have the same modes.
3954
 
3955
@cindex @code{reduc_uplus_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3956
@item @samp{reduc_uplus_@var{m}}
3957
Compute the sum of the unsigned elements of a vector. The vector is operand 1,
3958
and the scalar result is stored in the least significant bits of operand 0
3959
(also a vector). The output and input vector should have the same modes.
3960
 
3961
@cindex @code{sdot_prod@var{m}} instruction pattern
3962
@item @samp{sdot_prod@var{m}}
3963
@cindex @code{udot_prod@var{m}} instruction pattern
3964
@item @samp{udot_prod@var{m}}
3965
Compute the sum of the products of two signed/unsigned elements.
3966
Operand 1 and operand 2 are of the same mode. Their product, which is of a
3967
wider mode, is computed and added to operand 3. Operand 3 is of a mode equal or
3968
wider than the mode of the product. The result is placed in operand 0, which
3969
is of the same mode as operand 3.
3970
 
3971
@cindex @code{ssum_widen@var{m3}} instruction pattern
3972
@item @samp{ssum_widen@var{m3}}
3973
@cindex @code{usum_widen@var{m3}} instruction pattern
3974
@item @samp{usum_widen@var{m3}}
3975
Operands 0 and 2 are of the same mode, which is wider than the mode of
3976
operand 1. Add operand 1 to operand 2 and place the widened result in
3977
operand 0. (This is used express accumulation of elements into an accumulator
3978
of a wider mode.)
3979
 
3980
@cindex @code{vec_shl_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3981
@cindex @code{vec_shr_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3982
@item @samp{vec_shl_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_shr_@var{m}}
3983
Whole vector left/right shift in bits.
3984
Operand 1 is a vector to be shifted.
3985
Operand 2 is an integer shift amount in bits.
3986
Operand 0 is where the resulting shifted vector is stored.
3987
The output and input vectors should have the same modes.
3988
 
3989
@cindex @code{vec_pack_trunc_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3990
@item @samp{vec_pack_trunc_@var{m}}
3991
Narrow (demote) and merge the elements of two vectors. Operands 1 and 2
3992
are vectors of the same mode having N integral or floating point elements
3993
of size S@.  Operand 0 is the resulting vector in which 2*N elements of
3994
size N/2 are concatenated after narrowing them down using truncation.
3995
 
3996
@cindex @code{vec_pack_ssat_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3997
@cindex @code{vec_pack_usat_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3998
@item @samp{vec_pack_ssat_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_pack_usat_@var{m}}
3999
Narrow (demote) and merge the elements of two vectors.  Operands 1 and 2
4000
are vectors of the same mode having N integral elements of size S.
4001
Operand 0 is the resulting vector in which the elements of the two input
4002
vectors are concatenated after narrowing them down using signed/unsigned
4003
saturating arithmetic.
4004
 
4005
@cindex @code{vec_pack_sfix_trunc_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4006
@cindex @code{vec_pack_ufix_trunc_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4007
@item @samp{vec_pack_sfix_trunc_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_pack_ufix_trunc_@var{m}}
4008
Narrow, convert to signed/unsigned integral type and merge the elements
4009
of two vectors.  Operands 1 and 2 are vectors of the same mode having N
4010
floating point elements of size S@.  Operand 0 is the resulting vector
4011
in which 2*N elements of size N/2 are concatenated.
4012
 
4013
@cindex @code{vec_unpacks_hi_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4014
@cindex @code{vec_unpacks_lo_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4015
@item @samp{vec_unpacks_hi_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_unpacks_lo_@var{m}}
4016
Extract and widen (promote) the high/low part of a vector of signed
4017
integral or floating point elements.  The input vector (operand 1) has N
4018
elements of size S@.  Widen (promote) the high/low elements of the vector
4019
using signed or floating point extension and place the resulting N/2
4020
values of size 2*S in the output vector (operand 0).
4021
 
4022
@cindex @code{vec_unpacku_hi_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4023
@cindex @code{vec_unpacku_lo_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4024
@item @samp{vec_unpacku_hi_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_unpacku_lo_@var{m}}
4025
Extract and widen (promote) the high/low part of a vector of unsigned
4026
integral elements.  The input vector (operand 1) has N elements of size S.
4027
Widen (promote) the high/low elements of the vector using zero extension and
4028
place the resulting N/2 values of size 2*S in the output vector (operand 0).
4029
 
4030
@cindex @code{vec_unpacks_float_hi_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4031
@cindex @code{vec_unpacks_float_lo_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4032
@cindex @code{vec_unpacku_float_hi_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4033
@cindex @code{vec_unpacku_float_lo_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4034
@item @samp{vec_unpacks_float_hi_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_unpacks_float_lo_@var{m}}
4035
@itemx @samp{vec_unpacku_float_hi_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_unpacku_float_lo_@var{m}}
4036
Extract, convert to floating point type and widen the high/low part of a
4037
vector of signed/unsigned integral elements.  The input vector (operand 1)
4038
has N elements of size S@.  Convert the high/low elements of the vector using
4039
floating point conversion and place the resulting N/2 values of size 2*S in
4040
the output vector (operand 0).
4041
 
4042
@cindex @code{vec_widen_umult_hi_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4043
@cindex @code{vec_widen_umult_lo__@var{m}} instruction pattern
4044
@cindex @code{vec_widen_smult_hi_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4045
@cindex @code{vec_widen_smult_lo_@var{m}} instruction pattern
4046
@item @samp{vec_widen_umult_hi_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_widen_umult_lo_@var{m}}
4047
@itemx @samp{vec_widen_smult_hi_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_widen_smult_lo_@var{m}}
4048
Signed/Unsigned widening multiplication.  The two inputs (operands 1 and 2)
4049
are vectors with N signed/unsigned elements of size S@.  Multiply the high/low
4050
elements of the two vectors, and put the N/2 products of size 2*S in the
4051
output vector (operand 0).
4052
 
4053
@cindex @code{mulhisi3} instruction pattern
4054
@item @samp{mulhisi3}
4055
Multiply operands 1 and 2, which have mode @code{HImode}, and store
4056
a @code{SImode} product in operand 0.
4057
 
4058
@cindex @code{mulqihi3} instruction pattern
4059
@cindex @code{mulsidi3} instruction pattern
4060
@item @samp{mulqihi3}, @samp{mulsidi3}
4061
Similar widening-multiplication instructions of other widths.
4062
 
4063
@cindex @code{umulqihi3} instruction pattern
4064
@cindex @code{umulhisi3} instruction pattern
4065
@cindex @code{umulsidi3} instruction pattern
4066
@item @samp{umulqihi3}, @samp{umulhisi3}, @samp{umulsidi3}
4067
Similar widening-multiplication instructions that do unsigned
4068
multiplication.
4069
 
4070
@cindex @code{usmulqihi3} instruction pattern
4071
@cindex @code{usmulhisi3} instruction pattern
4072
@cindex @code{usmulsidi3} instruction pattern
4073
@item @samp{usmulqihi3}, @samp{usmulhisi3}, @samp{usmulsidi3}
4074
Similar widening-multiplication instructions that interpret the first
4075
operand as unsigned and the second operand as signed, then do a signed
4076
multiplication.
4077
 
4078
@cindex @code{smul@var{m}3_highpart} instruction pattern
4079
@item @samp{smul@var{m}3_highpart}
4080
Perform a signed multiplication of operands 1 and 2, which have mode
4081
@var{m}, and store the most significant half of the product in operand 0.
4082
The least significant half of the product is discarded.
4083
 
4084
@cindex @code{umul@var{m}3_highpart} instruction pattern
4085
@item @samp{umul@var{m}3_highpart}
4086
Similar, but the multiplication is unsigned.
4087
 
4088
@cindex @code{madd@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern
4089
@item @samp{madd@var{m}@var{n}4}
4090
Multiply operands 1 and 2, sign-extend them to mode @var{n}, add
4091
operand 3, and store the result in operand 0.  Operands 1 and 2
4092
have mode @var{m} and operands 0 and 3 have mode @var{n}.
4093
Both modes must be integer or fixed-point modes and @var{n} must be twice
4094
the size of @var{m}.
4095
 
4096
In other words, @code{madd@var{m}@var{n}4} is like
4097
@code{mul@var{m}@var{n}3} except that it also adds operand 3.
4098
 
4099
These instructions are not allowed to @code{FAIL}.
4100
 
4101
@cindex @code{umadd@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern
4102
@item @samp{umadd@var{m}@var{n}4}
4103
Like @code{madd@var{m}@var{n}4}, but zero-extend the multiplication
4104
operands instead of sign-extending them.
4105
 
4106
@cindex @code{ssmadd@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern
4107
@item @samp{ssmadd@var{m}@var{n}4}
4108
Like @code{madd@var{m}@var{n}4}, but all involved operations must be
4109
signed-saturating.
4110
 
4111
@cindex @code{usmadd@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern
4112
@item @samp{usmadd@var{m}@var{n}4}
4113
Like @code{umadd@var{m}@var{n}4}, but all involved operations must be
4114
unsigned-saturating.
4115
 
4116
@cindex @code{msub@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern
4117
@item @samp{msub@var{m}@var{n}4}
4118
Multiply operands 1 and 2, sign-extend them to mode @var{n}, subtract the
4119
result from operand 3, and store the result in operand 0.  Operands 1 and 2
4120
have mode @var{m} and operands 0 and 3 have mode @var{n}.
4121
Both modes must be integer or fixed-point modes and @var{n} must be twice
4122
the size of @var{m}.
4123
 
4124
In other words, @code{msub@var{m}@var{n}4} is like
4125
@code{mul@var{m}@var{n}3} except that it also subtracts the result
4126
from operand 3.
4127
 
4128
These instructions are not allowed to @code{FAIL}.
4129
 
4130
@cindex @code{umsub@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern
4131
@item @samp{umsub@var{m}@var{n}4}
4132
Like @code{msub@var{m}@var{n}4}, but zero-extend the multiplication
4133
operands instead of sign-extending them.
4134
 
4135
@cindex @code{ssmsub@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern
4136
@item @samp{ssmsub@var{m}@var{n}4}
4137
Like @code{msub@var{m}@var{n}4}, but all involved operations must be
4138
signed-saturating.
4139
 
4140
@cindex @code{usmsub@var{m}@var{n}4} instruction pattern
4141
@item @samp{usmsub@var{m}@var{n}4}
4142
Like @code{umsub@var{m}@var{n}4}, but all involved operations must be
4143
unsigned-saturating.
4144
 
4145
@cindex @code{divmod@var{m}4} instruction pattern
4146
@item @samp{divmod@var{m}4}
4147
Signed division that produces both a quotient and a remainder.
4148
Operand 1 is divided by operand 2 to produce a quotient stored
4149
in operand 0 and a remainder stored in operand 3.
4150
 
4151
For machines with an instruction that produces both a quotient and a
4152
remainder, provide a pattern for @samp{divmod@var{m}4} but do not
4153
provide patterns for @samp{div@var{m}3} and @samp{mod@var{m}3}.  This
4154
allows optimization in the relatively common case when both the quotient
4155
and remainder are computed.
4156
 
4157
If an instruction that just produces a quotient or just a remainder
4158
exists and is more efficient than the instruction that produces both,
4159
write the output routine of @samp{divmod@var{m}4} to call
4160
@code{find_reg_note} and look for a @code{REG_UNUSED} note on the
4161
quotient or remainder and generate the appropriate instruction.
4162
 
4163
@cindex @code{udivmod@var{m}4} instruction pattern
4164
@item @samp{udivmod@var{m}4}
4165
Similar, but does unsigned division.
4166
 
4167
@anchor{shift patterns}
4168
@cindex @code{ashl@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4169
@cindex @code{ssashl@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4170
@cindex @code{usashl@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4171
@item @samp{ashl@var{m}3}, @samp{ssashl@var{m}3}, @samp{usashl@var{m}3}
4172
Arithmetic-shift operand 1 left by a number of bits specified by operand
4173
2, and store the result in operand 0.  Here @var{m} is the mode of
4174
operand 0 and operand 1; operand 2's mode is specified by the
4175
instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert the operand to that
4176
mode before generating the instruction.  The meaning of out-of-range shift
4177
counts can optionally be specified by @code{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}.
4178
@xref{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}.  Operand 2 is always a scalar type.
4179
 
4180
@cindex @code{ashr@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4181
@cindex @code{lshr@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4182
@cindex @code{rotl@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4183
@cindex @code{rotr@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4184
@item @samp{ashr@var{m}3}, @samp{lshr@var{m}3}, @samp{rotl@var{m}3}, @samp{rotr@var{m}3}
4185
Other shift and rotate instructions, analogous to the
4186
@code{ashl@var{m}3} instructions.  Operand 2 is always a scalar type.
4187
 
4188
@cindex @code{vashl@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4189
@cindex @code{vashr@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4190
@cindex @code{vlshr@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4191
@cindex @code{vrotl@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4192
@cindex @code{vrotr@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4193
@item @samp{vashl@var{m}3}, @samp{vashr@var{m}3}, @samp{vlshr@var{m}3}, @samp{vrotl@var{m}3}, @samp{vrotr@var{m}3}
4194
Vector shift and rotate instructions that take vectors as operand 2
4195
instead of a scalar type.
4196
 
4197
@cindex @code{neg@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4198
@cindex @code{ssneg@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4199
@cindex @code{usneg@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4200
@item @samp{neg@var{m}2}, @samp{ssneg@var{m}2}, @samp{usneg@var{m}2}
4201
Negate operand 1 and store the result in operand 0.
4202
 
4203
@cindex @code{abs@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4204
@item @samp{abs@var{m}2}
4205
Store the absolute value of operand 1 into operand 0.
4206
 
4207
@cindex @code{sqrt@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4208
@item @samp{sqrt@var{m}2}
4209
Store the square root of operand 1 into operand 0.
4210
 
4211
The @code{sqrt} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4212
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{sqrtf}
4213
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4214
type @code{float}.
4215
 
4216
@cindex @code{fmod@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4217
@item @samp{fmod@var{m}3}
4218
Store the remainder of dividing operand 1 by operand 2 into
4219
operand 0, rounded towards zero to an integer.
4220
 
4221
The @code{fmod} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4222
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{fmodf}
4223
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4224
type @code{float}.
4225
 
4226
@cindex @code{remainder@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4227
@item @samp{remainder@var{m}3}
4228
Store the remainder of dividing operand 1 by operand 2 into
4229
operand 0, rounded to the nearest integer.
4230
 
4231
The @code{remainder} built-in function of C always uses the mode
4232
which corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the
4233
@code{remainderf} built-in function uses the mode which corresponds
4234
to the C data type @code{float}.
4235
 
4236
@cindex @code{cos@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4237
@item @samp{cos@var{m}2}
4238
Store the cosine of operand 1 into operand 0.
4239
 
4240
The @code{cos} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4241
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{cosf}
4242
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4243
type @code{float}.
4244
 
4245
@cindex @code{sin@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4246
@item @samp{sin@var{m}2}
4247
Store the sine of operand 1 into operand 0.
4248
 
4249
The @code{sin} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4250
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{sinf}
4251
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4252
type @code{float}.
4253
 
4254
@cindex @code{exp@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4255
@item @samp{exp@var{m}2}
4256
Store the exponential of operand 1 into operand 0.
4257
 
4258
The @code{exp} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4259
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{expf}
4260
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4261
type @code{float}.
4262
 
4263
@cindex @code{log@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4264
@item @samp{log@var{m}2}
4265
Store the natural logarithm of operand 1 into operand 0.
4266
 
4267
The @code{log} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4268
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{logf}
4269
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4270
type @code{float}.
4271
 
4272
@cindex @code{pow@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4273
@item @samp{pow@var{m}3}
4274
Store the value of operand 1 raised to the exponent operand 2
4275
into operand 0.
4276
 
4277
The @code{pow} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4278
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{powf}
4279
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4280
type @code{float}.
4281
 
4282
@cindex @code{atan2@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4283
@item @samp{atan2@var{m}3}
4284
Store the arc tangent (inverse tangent) of operand 1 divided by
4285
operand 2 into operand 0, using the signs of both arguments to
4286
determine the quadrant of the result.
4287
 
4288
The @code{atan2} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4289
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{atan2f}
4290
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4291
type @code{float}.
4292
 
4293
@cindex @code{floor@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4294
@item @samp{floor@var{m}2}
4295
Store the largest integral value not greater than argument.
4296
 
4297
The @code{floor} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4298
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{floorf}
4299
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4300
type @code{float}.
4301
 
4302
@cindex @code{btrunc@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4303
@item @samp{btrunc@var{m}2}
4304
Store the argument rounded to integer towards zero.
4305
 
4306
The @code{trunc} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4307
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{truncf}
4308
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4309
type @code{float}.
4310
 
4311
@cindex @code{round@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4312
@item @samp{round@var{m}2}
4313
Store the argument rounded to integer away from zero.
4314
 
4315
The @code{round} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4316
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{roundf}
4317
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4318
type @code{float}.
4319
 
4320
@cindex @code{ceil@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4321
@item @samp{ceil@var{m}2}
4322
Store the argument rounded to integer away from zero.
4323
 
4324
The @code{ceil} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4325
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{ceilf}
4326
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4327
type @code{float}.
4328
 
4329
@cindex @code{nearbyint@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4330
@item @samp{nearbyint@var{m}2}
4331
Store the argument rounded according to the default rounding mode
4332
 
4333
The @code{nearbyint} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4334
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{nearbyintf}
4335
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4336
type @code{float}.
4337
 
4338
@cindex @code{rint@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4339
@item @samp{rint@var{m}2}
4340
Store the argument rounded according to the default rounding mode and
4341
raise the inexact exception when the result differs in value from
4342
the argument
4343
 
4344
The @code{rint} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4345
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{rintf}
4346
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4347
type @code{float}.
4348
 
4349
@cindex @code{lrint@var{m}@var{n}2}
4350
@item @samp{lrint@var{m}@var{n}2}
4351
Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed
4352
point mode @var{n} as a signed number according to the current
4353
rounding mode and store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).
4354
 
4355
@cindex @code{lround@var{m}@var{n}2}
4356
@item @samp{lround@var{m}2}
4357
Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed
4358
point mode @var{n} as a signed number rounding to nearest and away
4359
from zero and store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).
4360
 
4361
@cindex @code{lfloor@var{m}@var{n}2}
4362
@item @samp{lfloor@var{m}2}
4363
Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed
4364
point mode @var{n} as a signed number rounding down and store in
4365
operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).
4366
 
4367
@cindex @code{lceil@var{m}@var{n}2}
4368
@item @samp{lceil@var{m}2}
4369
Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed
4370
point mode @var{n} as a signed number rounding up and store in
4371
operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).
4372
 
4373
@cindex @code{copysign@var{m}3} instruction pattern
4374
@item @samp{copysign@var{m}3}
4375
Store a value with the magnitude of operand 1 and the sign of operand
4376
2 into operand 0.
4377
 
4378
The @code{copysign} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4379
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{copysignf}
4380
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
4381
type @code{float}.
4382
 
4383
@cindex @code{ffs@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4384
@item @samp{ffs@var{m}2}
4385
Store into operand 0 one plus the index of the least significant 1-bit
4386
of operand 1.  If operand 1 is zero, store zero.  @var{m} is the mode
4387
of operand 0; operand 1's mode is specified by the instruction
4388
pattern, and the compiler will convert the operand to that mode before
4389
generating the instruction.
4390
 
4391
The @code{ffs} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
4392
corresponds to the C data type @code{int}.
4393
 
4394
@cindex @code{clz@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4395
@item @samp{clz@var{m}2}
4396
Store into operand 0 the number of leading 0-bits in @var{x}, starting
4397
at the most significant bit position.  If @var{x} is 0, the
4398
@code{CLZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO} (@pxref{Misc}) macro defines if
4399
the result is undefined or has a useful value.
4400
@var{m} is the mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode is
4401
specified by the instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert the
4402
operand to that mode before generating the instruction.
4403
 
4404
@cindex @code{ctz@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4405
@item @samp{ctz@var{m}2}
4406
Store into operand 0 the number of trailing 0-bits in @var{x}, starting
4407
at the least significant bit position.  If @var{x} is 0, the
4408
@code{CTZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO} (@pxref{Misc}) macro defines if
4409
the result is undefined or has a useful value.
4410
@var{m} is the mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode is
4411
specified by the instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert the
4412
operand to that mode before generating the instruction.
4413
 
4414
@cindex @code{popcount@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4415
@item @samp{popcount@var{m}2}
4416
Store into operand 0 the number of 1-bits in @var{x}.  @var{m} is the
4417
mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode is specified by the instruction
4418
pattern, and the compiler will convert the operand to that mode before
4419
generating the instruction.
4420
 
4421
@cindex @code{parity@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4422
@item @samp{parity@var{m}2}
4423
Store into operand 0 the parity of @var{x}, i.e.@: the number of 1-bits
4424
in @var{x} modulo 2.  @var{m} is the mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode
4425
is specified by the instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert
4426
the operand to that mode before generating the instruction.
4427
 
4428
@cindex @code{one_cmpl@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4429
@item @samp{one_cmpl@var{m}2}
4430
Store the bitwise-complement of operand 1 into operand 0.
4431
 
4432
@cindex @code{movmem@var{m}} instruction pattern
4433
@item @samp{movmem@var{m}}
4434
Block move instruction.  The destination and source blocks of memory
4435
are the first two operands, and both are @code{mem:BLK}s with an
4436
address in mode @code{Pmode}.
4437
 
4438
The number of bytes to move is the third operand, in mode @var{m}.
4439
Usually, you specify @code{word_mode} for @var{m}.  However, if you can
4440
generate better code knowing the range of valid lengths is smaller than
4441
those representable in a full word, you should provide a pattern with a
4442
mode corresponding to the range of values you can handle efficiently
4443
(e.g., @code{QImode} for values in the range 0--127; note we avoid numbers
4444
that appear negative) and also a pattern with @code{word_mode}.
4445
 
4446
The fourth operand is the known shared alignment of the source and
4447
destination, in the form of a @code{const_int} rtx.  Thus, if the
4448
compiler knows that both source and destination are word-aligned,
4449
it may provide the value 4 for this operand.
4450
 
4451
Optional operands 5 and 6 specify expected alignment and size of block
4452
respectively.  The expected alignment differs from alignment in operand 4
4453
in a way that the blocks are not required to be aligned according to it in
4454
all cases. This expected alignment is also in bytes, just like operand 4.
4455
Expected size, when unknown, is set to @code{(const_int -1)}.
4456
 
4457
Descriptions of multiple @code{movmem@var{m}} patterns can only be
4458
beneficial if the patterns for smaller modes have fewer restrictions
4459
on their first, second and fourth operands.  Note that the mode @var{m}
4460
in @code{movmem@var{m}} does not impose any restriction on the mode of
4461
individually moved data units in the block.
4462
 
4463
These patterns need not give special consideration to the possibility
4464
that the source and destination strings might overlap.
4465
 
4466
@cindex @code{movstr} instruction pattern
4467
@item @samp{movstr}
4468
String copy instruction, with @code{stpcpy} semantics.  Operand 0 is
4469
an output operand in mode @code{Pmode}.  The addresses of the
4470
destination and source strings are operands 1 and 2, and both are
4471
@code{mem:BLK}s with addresses in mode @code{Pmode}.  The execution of
4472
the expansion of this pattern should store in operand 0 the address in
4473
which the @code{NUL} terminator was stored in the destination string.
4474
 
4475
@cindex @code{setmem@var{m}} instruction pattern
4476
@item @samp{setmem@var{m}}
4477
Block set instruction.  The destination string is the first operand,
4478
given as a @code{mem:BLK} whose address is in mode @code{Pmode}.  The
4479
number of bytes to set is the second operand, in mode @var{m}.  The value to
4480
initialize the memory with is the third operand. Targets that only support the
4481
clearing of memory should reject any value that is not the constant 0.  See
4482
@samp{movmem@var{m}} for a discussion of the choice of mode.
4483
 
4484
The fourth operand is the known alignment of the destination, in the form
4485
of a @code{const_int} rtx.  Thus, if the compiler knows that the
4486
destination is word-aligned, it may provide the value 4 for this
4487
operand.
4488
 
4489
Optional operands 5 and 6 specify expected alignment and size of block
4490
respectively.  The expected alignment differs from alignment in operand 4
4491
in a way that the blocks are not required to be aligned according to it in
4492
all cases. This expected alignment is also in bytes, just like operand 4.
4493
Expected size, when unknown, is set to @code{(const_int -1)}.
4494
 
4495
The use for multiple @code{setmem@var{m}} is as for @code{movmem@var{m}}.
4496
 
4497
@cindex @code{cmpstrn@var{m}} instruction pattern
4498
@item @samp{cmpstrn@var{m}}
4499
String compare instruction, with five operands.  Operand 0 is the output;
4500
it has mode @var{m}.  The remaining four operands are like the operands
4501
of @samp{movmem@var{m}}.  The two memory blocks specified are compared
4502
byte by byte in lexicographic order starting at the beginning of each
4503
string.  The instruction is not allowed to prefetch more than one byte
4504
at a time since either string may end in the first byte and reading past
4505
that may access an invalid page or segment and cause a fault.  The
4506
effect of the instruction is to store a value in operand 0 whose sign
4507
indicates the result of the comparison.
4508
 
4509
@cindex @code{cmpstr@var{m}} instruction pattern
4510
@item @samp{cmpstr@var{m}}
4511
String compare instruction, without known maximum length.  Operand 0 is the
4512
output; it has mode @var{m}.  The second and third operand are the blocks of
4513
memory to be compared; both are @code{mem:BLK} with an address in mode
4514
@code{Pmode}.
4515
 
4516
The fourth operand is the known shared alignment of the source and
4517
destination, in the form of a @code{const_int} rtx.  Thus, if the
4518
compiler knows that both source and destination are word-aligned,
4519
it may provide the value 4 for this operand.
4520
 
4521
The two memory blocks specified are compared byte by byte in lexicographic
4522
order starting at the beginning of each string.  The instruction is not allowed
4523
to prefetch more than one byte at a time since either string may end in the
4524
first byte and reading past that may access an invalid page or segment and
4525
cause a fault.  The effect of the instruction is to store a value in operand 0
4526
whose sign indicates the result of the comparison.
4527
 
4528
@cindex @code{cmpmem@var{m}} instruction pattern
4529
@item @samp{cmpmem@var{m}}
4530
Block compare instruction, with five operands like the operands
4531
of @samp{cmpstr@var{m}}.  The two memory blocks specified are compared
4532
byte by byte in lexicographic order starting at the beginning of each
4533
block.  Unlike @samp{cmpstr@var{m}} the instruction can prefetch
4534
any bytes in the two memory blocks.  The effect of the instruction is
4535
to store a value in operand 0 whose sign indicates the result of the
4536
comparison.
4537
 
4538
@cindex @code{strlen@var{m}} instruction pattern
4539
@item @samp{strlen@var{m}}
4540
Compute the length of a string, with three operands.
4541
Operand 0 is the result (of mode @var{m}), operand 1 is
4542
a @code{mem} referring to the first character of the string,
4543
operand 2 is the character to search for (normally zero),
4544
and operand 3 is a constant describing the known alignment
4545
of the beginning of the string.
4546
 
4547
@cindex @code{float@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4548
@item @samp{float@var{m}@var{n}2}
4549
Convert signed integer operand 1 (valid for fixed point mode @var{m}) to
4550
floating point mode @var{n} and store in operand 0 (which has mode
4551
@var{n}).
4552
 
4553
@cindex @code{floatuns@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4554
@item @samp{floatuns@var{m}@var{n}2}
4555
Convert unsigned integer operand 1 (valid for fixed point mode @var{m})
4556
to floating point mode @var{n} and store in operand 0 (which has mode
4557
@var{n}).
4558
 
4559
@cindex @code{fix@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4560
@item @samp{fix@var{m}@var{n}2}
4561
Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed
4562
point mode @var{n} as a signed number and store in operand 0 (which
4563
has mode @var{n}).  This instruction's result is defined only when
4564
the value of operand 1 is an integer.
4565
 
4566
If the machine description defines this pattern, it also needs to
4567
define the @code{ftrunc} pattern.
4568
 
4569
@cindex @code{fixuns@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4570
@item @samp{fixuns@var{m}@var{n}2}
4571
Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed
4572
point mode @var{n} as an unsigned number and store in operand 0 (which
4573
has mode @var{n}).  This instruction's result is defined only when the
4574
value of operand 1 is an integer.
4575
 
4576
@cindex @code{ftrunc@var{m}2} instruction pattern
4577
@item @samp{ftrunc@var{m}2}
4578
Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to an
4579
integer value, still represented in floating point mode @var{m}, and
4580
store it in operand 0 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}).
4581
 
4582
@cindex @code{fix_trunc@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4583
@item @samp{fix_trunc@var{m}@var{n}2}
4584
Like @samp{fix@var{m}@var{n}2} but works for any floating point value
4585
of mode @var{m} by converting the value to an integer.
4586
 
4587
@cindex @code{fixuns_trunc@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4588
@item @samp{fixuns_trunc@var{m}@var{n}2}
4589
Like @samp{fixuns@var{m}@var{n}2} but works for any floating point
4590
value of mode @var{m} by converting the value to an integer.
4591
 
4592
@cindex @code{trunc@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4593
@item @samp{trunc@var{m}@var{n}2}
4594
Truncate operand 1 (valid for mode @var{m}) to mode @var{n} and
4595
store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).  Both modes must be fixed
4596
point or both floating point.
4597
 
4598
@cindex @code{extend@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4599
@item @samp{extend@var{m}@var{n}2}
4600
Sign-extend operand 1 (valid for mode @var{m}) to mode @var{n} and
4601
store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).  Both modes must be fixed
4602
point or both floating point.
4603
 
4604
@cindex @code{zero_extend@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4605
@item @samp{zero_extend@var{m}@var{n}2}
4606
Zero-extend operand 1 (valid for mode @var{m}) to mode @var{n} and
4607
store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).  Both modes must be fixed
4608
point.
4609
 
4610
@cindex @code{fract@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4611
@item @samp{fract@var{m}@var{n}2}
4612
Convert operand 1 of mode @var{m} to mode @var{n} and store in
4613
operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).  Mode @var{m} and mode @var{n}
4614
could be fixed-point to fixed-point, signed integer to fixed-point,
4615
fixed-point to signed integer, floating-point to fixed-point,
4616
or fixed-point to floating-point.
4617
When overflows or underflows happen, the results are undefined.
4618
 
4619
@cindex @code{satfract@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4620
@item @samp{satfract@var{m}@var{n}2}
4621
Convert operand 1 of mode @var{m} to mode @var{n} and store in
4622
operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).  Mode @var{m} and mode @var{n}
4623
could be fixed-point to fixed-point, signed integer to fixed-point,
4624
or floating-point to fixed-point.
4625
When overflows or underflows happen, the instruction saturates the
4626
results to the maximum or the minimum.
4627
 
4628
@cindex @code{fractuns@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4629
@item @samp{fractuns@var{m}@var{n}2}
4630
Convert operand 1 of mode @var{m} to mode @var{n} and store in
4631
operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).  Mode @var{m} and mode @var{n}
4632
could be unsigned integer to fixed-point, or
4633
fixed-point to unsigned integer.
4634
When overflows or underflows happen, the results are undefined.
4635
 
4636
@cindex @code{satfractuns@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
4637
@item @samp{satfractuns@var{m}@var{n}2}
4638
Convert unsigned integer operand 1 of mode @var{m} to fixed-point mode
4639
@var{n} and store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).
4640
When overflows or underflows happen, the instruction saturates the
4641
results to the maximum or the minimum.
4642
 
4643
@cindex @code{extv} instruction pattern
4644
@item @samp{extv}
4645
Extract a bit-field from operand 1 (a register or memory operand), where
4646
operand 2 specifies the width in bits and operand 3 the starting bit,
4647
and store it in operand 0.  Operand 0 must have mode @code{word_mode}.
4648
Operand 1 may have mode @code{byte_mode} or @code{word_mode}; often
4649
@code{word_mode} is allowed only for registers.  Operands 2 and 3 must
4650
be valid for @code{word_mode}.
4651
 
4652
The RTL generation pass generates this instruction only with constants
4653
for operands 2 and 3 and the constant is never zero for operand 2.
4654
 
4655
The bit-field value is sign-extended to a full word integer
4656
before it is stored in operand 0.
4657
 
4658
@cindex @code{extzv} instruction pattern
4659
@item @samp{extzv}
4660
Like @samp{extv} except that the bit-field value is zero-extended.
4661
 
4662
@cindex @code{insv} instruction pattern
4663
@item @samp{insv}
4664
Store operand 3 (which must be valid for @code{word_mode}) into a
4665
bit-field in operand 0, where operand 1 specifies the width in bits and
4666
operand 2 the starting bit.  Operand 0 may have mode @code{byte_mode} or
4667
@code{word_mode}; often @code{word_mode} is allowed only for registers.
4668
Operands 1 and 2 must be valid for @code{word_mode}.
4669
 
4670
The RTL generation pass generates this instruction only with constants
4671
for operands 1 and 2 and the constant is never zero for operand 1.
4672
 
4673
@cindex @code{mov@var{mode}cc} instruction pattern
4674
@item @samp{mov@var{mode}cc}
4675
Conditionally move operand 2 or operand 3 into operand 0 according to the
4676
comparison in operand 1.  If the comparison is true, operand 2 is moved
4677
into operand 0, otherwise operand 3 is moved.
4678
 
4679
The mode of the operands being compared need not be the same as the operands
4680
being moved.  Some machines, sparc64 for example, have instructions that
4681
conditionally move an integer value based on the floating point condition
4682
codes and vice versa.
4683
 
4684
If the machine does not have conditional move instructions, do not
4685
define these patterns.
4686
 
4687
@cindex @code{add@var{mode}cc} instruction pattern
4688
@item @samp{add@var{mode}cc}
4689
Similar to @samp{mov@var{mode}cc} but for conditional addition.  Conditionally
4690
move operand 2 or (operands 2 + operand 3) into operand 0 according to the
4691
comparison in operand 1.  If the comparison is true, operand 2 is moved into
4692
operand 0, otherwise (operand 2 + operand 3) is moved.
4693
 
4694
@cindex @code{cstore@var{mode}4} instruction pattern
4695
@item @samp{cstore@var{mode}4}
4696
Store zero or nonzero in operand 0 according to whether a comparison
4697
is true.  Operand 1 is a comparison operator.  Operand 2 and operand 3
4698
are the first and second operand of the comparison, respectively.
4699
You specify the mode that operand 0 must have when you write the
4700
@code{match_operand} expression.  The compiler automatically sees which
4701
mode you have used and supplies an operand of that mode.
4702
 
4703
The value stored for a true condition must have 1 as its low bit, or
4704
else must be negative.  Otherwise the instruction is not suitable and
4705
you should omit it from the machine description.  You describe to the
4706
compiler exactly which value is stored by defining the macro
4707
@code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} (@pxref{Misc}).  If a description cannot be
4708
found that can be used for all the @samp{s@var{cond}} patterns, you
4709
should omit those operations from the machine description.
4710
 
4711
These operations may fail, but should do so only in relatively
4712
uncommon cases; if they would fail for common cases involving
4713
integer comparisons, it is best to omit these patterns.
4714
 
4715
If these operations are omitted, the compiler will usually generate code
4716
that copies the constant one to the target and branches around an
4717
assignment of zero to the target.  If this code is more efficient than
4718
the potential instructions used for the @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} pattern
4719
followed by those required to convert the result into a 1 or a zero in
4720
@code{SImode}, you should omit the @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} operations from
4721
the machine description.
4722
 
4723
@cindex @code{cbranch@var{mode}4} instruction pattern
4724
@item @samp{cbranch@var{mode}4}
4725
Conditional branch instruction combined with a compare instruction.
4726
Operand 0 is a comparison operator.  Operand 1 and operand 2 are the
4727
first and second operands of the comparison, respectively.  Operand 3
4728
is a @code{label_ref} that refers to the label to jump to.
4729
 
4730
@cindex @code{jump} instruction pattern
4731
@item @samp{jump}
4732
A jump inside a function; an unconditional branch.  Operand 0 is the
4733
@code{label_ref} of the label to jump to.  This pattern name is mandatory
4734
on all machines.
4735
 
4736
@cindex @code{call} instruction pattern
4737
@item @samp{call}
4738
Subroutine call instruction returning no value.  Operand 0 is the
4739
function to call; operand 1 is the number of bytes of arguments pushed
4740
as a @code{const_int}; operand 2 is the number of registers used as
4741
operands.
4742
 
4743
On most machines, operand 2 is not actually stored into the RTL
4744
pattern.  It is supplied for the sake of some RISC machines which need
4745
to put this information into the assembler code; they can put it in
4746
the RTL instead of operand 1.
4747
 
4748
Operand 0 should be a @code{mem} RTX whose address is the address of the
4749
function.  Note, however, that this address can be a @code{symbol_ref}
4750
expression even if it would not be a legitimate memory address on the
4751
target machine.  If it is also not a valid argument for a call
4752
instruction, the pattern for this operation should be a
4753
@code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions}) that places the
4754
address into a register and uses that register in the call instruction.
4755
 
4756
@cindex @code{call_value} instruction pattern
4757
@item @samp{call_value}
4758
Subroutine call instruction returning a value.  Operand 0 is the hard
4759
register in which the value is returned.  There are three more
4760
operands, the same as the three operands of the @samp{call}
4761
instruction (but with numbers increased by one).
4762
 
4763
Subroutines that return @code{BLKmode} objects use the @samp{call}
4764
insn.
4765
 
4766
@cindex @code{call_pop} instruction pattern
4767
@cindex @code{call_value_pop} instruction pattern
4768
@item @samp{call_pop}, @samp{call_value_pop}
4769
Similar to @samp{call} and @samp{call_value}, except used if defined and
4770
if @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} is nonzero.  They should emit a @code{parallel}
4771
that contains both the function call and a @code{set} to indicate the
4772
adjustment made to the frame pointer.
4773
 
4774
For machines where @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} can be nonzero, the use of these
4775
patterns increases the number of functions for which the frame pointer
4776
can be eliminated, if desired.
4777
 
4778
@cindex @code{untyped_call} instruction pattern
4779
@item @samp{untyped_call}
4780
Subroutine call instruction returning a value of any type.  Operand 0 is
4781
the function to call; operand 1 is a memory location where the result of
4782
calling the function is to be stored; operand 2 is a @code{parallel}
4783
expression where each element is a @code{set} expression that indicates
4784
the saving of a function return value into the result block.
4785
 
4786
This instruction pattern should be defined to support
4787
@code{__builtin_apply} on machines where special instructions are needed
4788
to call a subroutine with arbitrary arguments or to save the value
4789
returned.  This instruction pattern is required on machines that have
4790
multiple registers that can hold a return value
4791
(i.e.@: @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} is true for more than one register).
4792
 
4793
@cindex @code{return} instruction pattern
4794
@item @samp{return}
4795
Subroutine return instruction.  This instruction pattern name should be
4796
defined only if a single instruction can do all the work of returning
4797
from a function.
4798
 
4799
Like the @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, this pattern is also used after the
4800
RTL generation phase.  In this case it is to support machines where
4801
multiple instructions are usually needed to return from a function, but
4802
some class of functions only requires one instruction to implement a
4803
return.  Normally, the applicable functions are those which do not need
4804
to save any registers or allocate stack space.
4805
 
4806
@findex reload_completed
4807
@findex leaf_function_p
4808
For such machines, the condition specified in this pattern should only
4809
be true when @code{reload_completed} is nonzero and the function's
4810
epilogue would only be a single instruction.  For machines with register
4811
windows, the routine @code{leaf_function_p} may be used to determine if
4812
a register window push is required.
4813
 
4814
Machines that have conditional return instructions should define patterns
4815
such as
4816
 
4817
@smallexample
4818
(define_insn ""
4819
  [(set (pc)
4820
        (if_then_else (match_operator
4821
 
4822
                         [(cc0) (const_int 0)])
4823
                      (return)
4824
                      (pc)))]
4825
  "@var{condition}"
4826
  "@dots{}")
4827
@end smallexample
4828
 
4829
where @var{condition} would normally be the same condition specified on the
4830
named @samp{return} pattern.
4831
 
4832
@cindex @code{untyped_return} instruction pattern
4833
@item @samp{untyped_return}
4834
Untyped subroutine return instruction.  This instruction pattern should
4835
be defined to support @code{__builtin_return} on machines where special
4836
instructions are needed to return a value of any type.
4837
 
4838
Operand 0 is a memory location where the result of calling a function
4839
with @code{__builtin_apply} is stored; operand 1 is a @code{parallel}
4840
expression where each element is a @code{set} expression that indicates
4841
the restoring of a function return value from the result block.
4842
 
4843
@cindex @code{nop} instruction pattern
4844
@item @samp{nop}
4845
No-op instruction.  This instruction pattern name should always be defined
4846
to output a no-op in assembler code.  @code{(const_int 0)} will do as an
4847
RTL pattern.
4848
 
4849
@cindex @code{indirect_jump} instruction pattern
4850
@item @samp{indirect_jump}
4851
An instruction to jump to an address which is operand zero.
4852
This pattern name is mandatory on all machines.
4853
 
4854
@cindex @code{casesi} instruction pattern
4855
@item @samp{casesi}
4856
Instruction to jump through a dispatch table, including bounds checking.
4857
This instruction takes five operands:
4858
 
4859
@enumerate
4860
@item
4861
The index to dispatch on, which has mode @code{SImode}.
4862
 
4863
@item
4864
The lower bound for indices in the table, an integer constant.
4865
 
4866
@item
4867
The total range of indices in the table---the largest index
4868
minus the smallest one (both inclusive).
4869
 
4870
@item
4871
A label that precedes the table itself.
4872
 
4873
@item
4874
A label to jump to if the index has a value outside the bounds.
4875
@end enumerate
4876
 
4877
The table is an @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec} inside of a
4878
@code{jump_insn}.  The number of elements in the table is one plus the
4879
difference between the upper bound and the lower bound.
4880
 
4881
@cindex @code{tablejump} instruction pattern
4882
@item @samp{tablejump}
4883
Instruction to jump to a variable address.  This is a low-level
4884
capability which can be used to implement a dispatch table when there
4885
is no @samp{casesi} pattern.
4886
 
4887
This pattern requires two operands: the address or offset, and a label
4888
which should immediately precede the jump table.  If the macro
4889
@code{CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE} evaluates to a nonzero value then the first
4890
operand is an offset which counts from the address of the table; otherwise,
4891
it is an absolute address to jump to.  In either case, the first operand has
4892
mode @code{Pmode}.
4893
 
4894
The @samp{tablejump} insn is always the last insn before the jump
4895
table it uses.  Its assembler code normally has no need to use the
4896
second operand, but you should incorporate it in the RTL pattern so
4897
that the jump optimizer will not delete the table as unreachable code.
4898
 
4899
 
4900
@cindex @code{decrement_and_branch_until_zero} instruction pattern
4901
@item @samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero}
4902
Conditional branch instruction that decrements a register and
4903
jumps if the register is nonzero.  Operand 0 is the register to
4904
decrement and test; operand 1 is the label to jump to if the
4905
register is nonzero.  @xref{Looping Patterns}.
4906
 
4907
This optional instruction pattern is only used by the combiner,
4908
typically for loops reversed by the loop optimizer when strength
4909
reduction is enabled.
4910
 
4911
@cindex @code{doloop_end} instruction pattern
4912
@item @samp{doloop_end}
4913
Conditional branch instruction that decrements a register and jumps if
4914
the register is nonzero.  This instruction takes five operands: Operand
4915
 
4916
iterations as a @code{const_int} or @code{const0_rtx} if this cannot be
4917
determined until run-time; operand 2 is the actual or estimated maximum
4918
number of iterations as a @code{const_int}; operand 3 is the number of
4919
enclosed loops as a @code{const_int} (an innermost loop has a value of
4920
1); operand 4 is the label to jump to if the register is nonzero.
4921
@xref{Looping Patterns}.
4922
 
4923
This optional instruction pattern should be defined for machines with
4924
low-overhead looping instructions as the loop optimizer will try to
4925
modify suitable loops to utilize it.  If nested low-overhead looping is
4926
not supported, use a @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions})
4927
and make the pattern fail if operand 3 is not @code{const1_rtx}.
4928
Similarly, if the actual or estimated maximum number of iterations is
4929
too large for this instruction, make it fail.
4930
 
4931
@cindex @code{doloop_begin} instruction pattern
4932
@item @samp{doloop_begin}
4933
Companion instruction to @code{doloop_end} required for machines that
4934
need to perform some initialization, such as loading special registers
4935
used by a low-overhead looping instruction.  If initialization insns do
4936
not always need to be emitted, use a @code{define_expand}
4937
(@pxref{Expander Definitions}) and make it fail.
4938
 
4939
 
4940
@cindex @code{canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare} instruction pattern
4941
@item @samp{canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare}
4942
Canonicalize the function pointer in operand 1 and store the result
4943
into operand 0.
4944
 
4945
Operand 0 is always a @code{reg} and has mode @code{Pmode}; operand 1
4946
may be a @code{reg}, @code{mem}, @code{symbol_ref}, @code{const_int}, etc
4947
and also has mode @code{Pmode}.
4948
 
4949
Canonicalization of a function pointer usually involves computing
4950
the address of the function which would be called if the function
4951
pointer were used in an indirect call.
4952
 
4953
Only define this pattern if function pointers on the target machine
4954
can have different values but still call the same function when
4955
used in an indirect call.
4956
 
4957
@cindex @code{save_stack_block} instruction pattern
4958
@cindex @code{save_stack_function} instruction pattern
4959
@cindex @code{save_stack_nonlocal} instruction pattern
4960
@cindex @code{restore_stack_block} instruction pattern
4961
@cindex @code{restore_stack_function} instruction pattern
4962
@cindex @code{restore_stack_nonlocal} instruction pattern
4963
@item @samp{save_stack_block}
4964
@itemx @samp{save_stack_function}
4965
@itemx @samp{save_stack_nonlocal}
4966
@itemx @samp{restore_stack_block}
4967
@itemx @samp{restore_stack_function}
4968
@itemx @samp{restore_stack_nonlocal}
4969
Most machines save and restore the stack pointer by copying it to or
4970
from an object of mode @code{Pmode}.  Do not define these patterns on
4971
such machines.
4972
 
4973
Some machines require special handling for stack pointer saves and
4974
restores.  On those machines, define the patterns corresponding to the
4975
non-standard cases by using a @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander
4976
Definitions}) that produces the required insns.  The three types of
4977
saves and restores are:
4978
 
4979
@enumerate
4980
@item
4981
@samp{save_stack_block} saves the stack pointer at the start of a block
4982
that allocates a variable-sized object, and @samp{restore_stack_block}
4983
restores the stack pointer when the block is exited.
4984
 
4985
@item
4986
@samp{save_stack_function} and @samp{restore_stack_function} do a
4987
similar job for the outermost block of a function and are used when the
4988
function allocates variable-sized objects or calls @code{alloca}.  Only
4989
the epilogue uses the restored stack pointer, allowing a simpler save or
4990
restore sequence on some machines.
4991
 
4992
@item
4993
@samp{save_stack_nonlocal} is used in functions that contain labels
4994
branched to by nested functions.  It saves the stack pointer in such a
4995
way that the inner function can use @samp{restore_stack_nonlocal} to
4996
restore the stack pointer.  The compiler generates code to restore the
4997
frame and argument pointer registers, but some machines require saving
4998
and restoring additional data such as register window information or
4999
stack backchains.  Place insns in these patterns to save and restore any
5000
such required data.
5001
@end enumerate
5002
 
5003
When saving the stack pointer, operand 0 is the save area and operand 1
5004
is the stack pointer.  The mode used to allocate the save area defaults
5005
to @code{Pmode} but you can override that choice by defining the
5006
@code{STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE} macro (@pxref{Storage Layout}).  You must
5007
specify an integral mode, or @code{VOIDmode} if no save area is needed
5008
for a particular type of save (either because no save is needed or
5009
because a machine-specific save area can be used).  Operand 0 is the
5010
stack pointer and operand 1 is the save area for restore operations.  If
5011
@samp{save_stack_block} is defined, operand 0 must not be
5012
@code{VOIDmode} since these saves can be arbitrarily nested.
5013
 
5014
A save area is a @code{mem} that is at a constant offset from
5015
@code{virtual_stack_vars_rtx} when the stack pointer is saved for use by
5016
nonlocal gotos and a @code{reg} in the other two cases.
5017
 
5018
@cindex @code{allocate_stack} instruction pattern
5019
@item @samp{allocate_stack}
5020
Subtract (or add if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is undefined) operand 1 from
5021
the stack pointer to create space for dynamically allocated data.
5022
 
5023
Store the resultant pointer to this space into operand 0.  If you
5024
are allocating space from the main stack, do this by emitting a
5025
move insn to copy @code{virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx} to operand 0.
5026
If you are allocating the space elsewhere, generate code to copy the
5027
location of the space to operand 0.  In the latter case, you must
5028
ensure this space gets freed when the corresponding space on the main
5029
stack is free.
5030
 
5031
Do not define this pattern if all that must be done is the subtraction.
5032
Some machines require other operations such as stack probes or
5033
maintaining the back chain.  Define this pattern to emit those
5034
operations in addition to updating the stack pointer.
5035
 
5036
@cindex @code{check_stack} instruction pattern
5037
@item @samp{check_stack}
5038
If stack checking (@pxref{Stack Checking}) cannot be done on your system by
5039
probing the stack, define this pattern to perform the needed check and signal
5040
an error if the stack has overflowed.  The single operand is the address in
5041
the stack farthest from the current stack pointer that you need to validate.
5042
Normally, on platforms where this pattern is needed, you would obtain the
5043
stack limit from a global or thread-specific variable or register.
5044
 
5045
@cindex @code{probe_stack} instruction pattern
5046
@item @samp{probe_stack}
5047
If stack checking (@pxref{Stack Checking}) can be done on your system by
5048
probing the stack but doing it with a ``store zero'' instruction is not valid
5049
or optimal, define this pattern to do the probing differently and signal an
5050
error if the stack has overflowed.  The single operand is the memory reference
5051
in the stack that needs to be probed.
5052
 
5053
@cindex @code{nonlocal_goto} instruction pattern
5054
@item @samp{nonlocal_goto}
5055
Emit code to generate a non-local goto, e.g., a jump from one function
5056
to a label in an outer function.  This pattern has four arguments,
5057
each representing a value to be used in the jump.  The first
5058
argument is to be loaded into the frame pointer, the second is
5059
the address to branch to (code to dispatch to the actual label),
5060
the third is the address of a location where the stack is saved,
5061
and the last is the address of the label, to be placed in the
5062
location for the incoming static chain.
5063
 
5064
On most machines you need not define this pattern, since GCC will
5065
already generate the correct code, which is to load the frame pointer
5066
and static chain, restore the stack (using the
5067
@samp{restore_stack_nonlocal} pattern, if defined), and jump indirectly
5068
to the dispatcher.  You need only define this pattern if this code will
5069
not work on your machine.
5070
 
5071
@cindex @code{nonlocal_goto_receiver} instruction pattern
5072
@item @samp{nonlocal_goto_receiver}
5073
This pattern, if defined, contains code needed at the target of a
5074
nonlocal goto after the code already generated by GCC@.  You will not
5075
normally need to define this pattern.  A typical reason why you might
5076
need this pattern is if some value, such as a pointer to a global table,
5077
must be restored when the frame pointer is restored.  Note that a nonlocal
5078
goto only occurs within a unit-of-translation, so a global table pointer
5079
that is shared by all functions of a given module need not be restored.
5080
There are no arguments.
5081
 
5082
@cindex @code{exception_receiver} instruction pattern
5083
@item @samp{exception_receiver}
5084
This pattern, if defined, contains code needed at the site of an
5085
exception handler that isn't needed at the site of a nonlocal goto.  You
5086
will not normally need to define this pattern.  A typical reason why you
5087
might need this pattern is if some value, such as a pointer to a global
5088
table, must be restored after control flow is branched to the handler of
5089
an exception.  There are no arguments.
5090
 
5091
@cindex @code{builtin_setjmp_setup} instruction pattern
5092
@item @samp{builtin_setjmp_setup}
5093
This pattern, if defined, contains additional code needed to initialize
5094
the @code{jmp_buf}.  You will not normally need to define this pattern.
5095
A typical reason why you might need this pattern is if some value, such
5096
as a pointer to a global table, must be restored.  Though it is
5097
preferred that the pointer value be recalculated if possible (given the
5098
address of a label for instance).  The single argument is a pointer to
5099
the @code{jmp_buf}.  Note that the buffer is five words long and that
5100
the first three are normally used by the generic mechanism.
5101
 
5102
@cindex @code{builtin_setjmp_receiver} instruction pattern
5103
@item @samp{builtin_setjmp_receiver}
5104
This pattern, if defined, contains code needed at the site of a
5105
built-in setjmp that isn't needed at the site of a nonlocal goto.  You
5106
will not normally need to define this pattern.  A typical reason why you
5107
might need this pattern is if some value, such as a pointer to a global
5108
table, must be restored.  It takes one argument, which is the label
5109
to which builtin_longjmp transfered control; this pattern may be emitted
5110
at a small offset from that label.
5111
 
5112
@cindex @code{builtin_longjmp} instruction pattern
5113
@item @samp{builtin_longjmp}
5114
This pattern, if defined, performs the entire action of the longjmp.
5115
You will not normally need to define this pattern unless you also define
5116
@code{builtin_setjmp_setup}.  The single argument is a pointer to the
5117
@code{jmp_buf}.
5118
 
5119
@cindex @code{eh_return} instruction pattern
5120
@item @samp{eh_return}
5121
This pattern, if defined, affects the way @code{__builtin_eh_return},
5122
and thence the call frame exception handling library routines, are
5123
built.  It is intended to handle non-trivial actions needed along
5124
the abnormal return path.
5125
 
5126
The address of the exception handler to which the function should return
5127
is passed as operand to this pattern.  It will normally need to copied by
5128
the pattern to some special register or memory location.
5129
If the pattern needs to determine the location of the target call
5130
frame in order to do so, it may use @code{EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX},
5131
if defined; it will have already been assigned.
5132
 
5133
If this pattern is not defined, the default action will be to simply
5134
copy the return address to @code{EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX}.  Either
5135
that macro or this pattern needs to be defined if call frame exception
5136
handling is to be used.
5137
 
5138
@cindex @code{prologue} instruction pattern
5139
@anchor{prologue instruction pattern}
5140
@item @samp{prologue}
5141
This pattern, if defined, emits RTL for entry to a function.  The function
5142
entry is responsible for setting up the stack frame, initializing the frame
5143
pointer register, saving callee saved registers, etc.
5144
 
5145
Using a prologue pattern is generally preferred over defining
5146
@code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} to emit assembly code for the prologue.
5147
 
5148
The @code{prologue} pattern is particularly useful for targets which perform
5149
instruction scheduling.
5150
 
5151
@cindex @code{epilogue} instruction pattern
5152
@anchor{epilogue instruction pattern}
5153
@item @samp{epilogue}
5154
This pattern emits RTL for exit from a function.  The function
5155
exit is responsible for deallocating the stack frame, restoring callee saved
5156
registers and emitting the return instruction.
5157
 
5158
Using an epilogue pattern is generally preferred over defining
5159
@code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to emit assembly code for the epilogue.
5160
 
5161
The @code{epilogue} pattern is particularly useful for targets which perform
5162
instruction scheduling or which have delay slots for their return instruction.
5163
 
5164
@cindex @code{sibcall_epilogue} instruction pattern
5165
@item @samp{sibcall_epilogue}
5166
This pattern, if defined, emits RTL for exit from a function without the final
5167
branch back to the calling function.  This pattern will be emitted before any
5168
sibling call (aka tail call) sites.
5169
 
5170
The @code{sibcall_epilogue} pattern must not clobber any arguments used for
5171
parameter passing or any stack slots for arguments passed to the current
5172
function.
5173
 
5174
@cindex @code{trap} instruction pattern
5175
@item @samp{trap}
5176
This pattern, if defined, signals an error, typically by causing some
5177
kind of signal to be raised.  Among other places, it is used by the Java
5178
front end to signal `invalid array index' exceptions.
5179
 
5180
@cindex @code{ctrap@var{MM}4} instruction pattern
5181
@item @samp{ctrap@var{MM}4}
5182
Conditional trap instruction.  Operand 0 is a piece of RTL which
5183
performs a comparison, and operands 1 and 2 are the arms of the
5184
comparison.  Operand 3 is the trap code, an integer.
5185
 
5186
A typical @code{ctrap} pattern looks like
5187
 
5188
@smallexample
5189
(define_insn "ctrapsi4"
5190
  [(trap_if (match_operator 0 "trap_operator"
5191
             [(match_operand 1 "register_operand")
5192
              (match_operand 2 "immediate_operand")])
5193
            (match_operand 3 "const_int_operand" "i"))]
5194
  ""
5195
  "@dots{}")
5196
@end smallexample
5197
 
5198
@cindex @code{prefetch} instruction pattern
5199
@item @samp{prefetch}
5200
 
5201
This pattern, if defined, emits code for a non-faulting data prefetch
5202
instruction.  Operand 0 is the address of the memory to prefetch.  Operand 1
5203
is a constant 1 if the prefetch is preparing for a write to the memory
5204
address, or a constant 0 otherwise.  Operand 2 is the expected degree of
5205
temporal locality of the data and is a value between 0 and 3, inclusive; 0
5206
means that the data has no temporal locality, so it need not be left in the
5207
cache after the access; 3 means that the data has a high degree of temporal
5208
locality and should be left in all levels of cache possible;  1 and 2 mean,
5209
respectively, a low or moderate degree of temporal locality.
5210
 
5211
Targets that do not support write prefetches or locality hints can ignore
5212
the values of operands 1 and 2.
5213
 
5214
@cindex @code{blockage} instruction pattern
5215
@item @samp{blockage}
5216
 
5217
This pattern defines a pseudo insn that prevents the instruction
5218
scheduler from moving instructions across the boundary defined by the
5219
blockage insn.  Normally an UNSPEC_VOLATILE pattern.
5220
 
5221
@cindex @code{memory_barrier} instruction pattern
5222
@item @samp{memory_barrier}
5223
 
5224
If the target memory model is not fully synchronous, then this pattern
5225
should be defined to an instruction that orders both loads and stores
5226
before the instruction with respect to loads and stores after the instruction.
5227
This pattern has no operands.
5228
 
5229
@cindex @code{sync_compare_and_swap@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5230
@item @samp{sync_compare_and_swap@var{mode}}
5231
 
5232
This pattern, if defined, emits code for an atomic compare-and-swap
5233
operation.  Operand 1 is the memory on which the atomic operation is
5234
performed.  Operand 2 is the ``old'' value to be compared against the
5235
current contents of the memory location.  Operand 3 is the ``new'' value
5236
to store in the memory if the compare succeeds.  Operand 0 is the result
5237
of the operation; it should contain the contents of the memory
5238
before the operation.  If the compare succeeds, this should obviously be
5239
a copy of operand 2.
5240
 
5241
This pattern must show that both operand 0 and operand 1 are modified.
5242
 
5243
This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that all
5244
memory operations before the atomic operation occur before the atomic
5245
operation and all memory operations after the atomic operation occur
5246
after the atomic operation.
5247
 
5248
For targets where the success or failure of the compare-and-swap
5249
operation is available via the status flags, it is possible to
5250
avoid a separate compare operation and issue the subsequent
5251
branch or store-flag operation immediately after the compare-and-swap.
5252
To this end, GCC will look for a @code{MODE_CC} set in the
5253
output of @code{sync_compare_and_swap@var{mode}}; if the machine
5254
description includes such a set, the target should also define special
5255
@code{cbranchcc4} and/or @code{cstorecc4} instructions.  GCC will then
5256
be able to take the destination of the @code{MODE_CC} set and pass it
5257
to the @code{cbranchcc4} or @code{cstorecc4} pattern as the first
5258
operand of the comparison (the second will be @code{(const_int 0)}).
5259
 
5260
@cindex @code{sync_add@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5261
@cindex @code{sync_sub@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5262
@cindex @code{sync_ior@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5263
@cindex @code{sync_and@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5264
@cindex @code{sync_xor@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5265
@cindex @code{sync_nand@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5266
@item @samp{sync_add@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_sub@var{mode}}
5267
@itemx @samp{sync_ior@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_and@var{mode}}
5268
@itemx @samp{sync_xor@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_nand@var{mode}}
5269
 
5270
These patterns emit code for an atomic operation on memory.
5271
Operand 0 is the memory on which the atomic operation is performed.
5272
Operand 1 is the second operand to the binary operator.
5273
 
5274
This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that all
5275
memory operations before the atomic operation occur before the atomic
5276
operation and all memory operations after the atomic operation occur
5277
after the atomic operation.
5278
 
5279
If these patterns are not defined, the operation will be constructed
5280
from a compare-and-swap operation, if defined.
5281
 
5282
@cindex @code{sync_old_add@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5283
@cindex @code{sync_old_sub@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5284
@cindex @code{sync_old_ior@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5285
@cindex @code{sync_old_and@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5286
@cindex @code{sync_old_xor@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5287
@cindex @code{sync_old_nand@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5288
@item @samp{sync_old_add@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_old_sub@var{mode}}
5289
@itemx @samp{sync_old_ior@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_old_and@var{mode}}
5290
@itemx @samp{sync_old_xor@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_old_nand@var{mode}}
5291
 
5292
These patterns are emit code for an atomic operation on memory,
5293
and return the value that the memory contained before the operation.
5294
Operand 0 is the result value, operand 1 is the memory on which the
5295
atomic operation is performed, and operand 2 is the second operand
5296
to the binary operator.
5297
 
5298
This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that all
5299
memory operations before the atomic operation occur before the atomic
5300
operation and all memory operations after the atomic operation occur
5301
after the atomic operation.
5302
 
5303
If these patterns are not defined, the operation will be constructed
5304
from a compare-and-swap operation, if defined.
5305
 
5306
@cindex @code{sync_new_add@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5307
@cindex @code{sync_new_sub@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5308
@cindex @code{sync_new_ior@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5309
@cindex @code{sync_new_and@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5310
@cindex @code{sync_new_xor@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5311
@cindex @code{sync_new_nand@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5312
@item @samp{sync_new_add@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_new_sub@var{mode}}
5313
@itemx @samp{sync_new_ior@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_new_and@var{mode}}
5314
@itemx @samp{sync_new_xor@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_new_nand@var{mode}}
5315
 
5316
These patterns are like their @code{sync_old_@var{op}} counterparts,
5317
except that they return the value that exists in the memory location
5318
after the operation, rather than before the operation.
5319
 
5320
@cindex @code{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5321
@item @samp{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}}
5322
 
5323
This pattern takes two forms, based on the capabilities of the target.
5324
In either case, operand 0 is the result of the operand, operand 1 is
5325
the memory on which the atomic operation is performed, and operand 2
5326
is the value to set in the lock.
5327
 
5328
In the ideal case, this operation is an atomic exchange operation, in
5329
which the previous value in memory operand is copied into the result
5330
operand, and the value operand is stored in the memory operand.
5331
 
5332
For less capable targets, any value operand that is not the constant 1
5333
should be rejected with @code{FAIL}.  In this case the target may use
5334
an atomic test-and-set bit operation.  The result operand should contain
5335
1 if the bit was previously set and 0 if the bit was previously clear.
5336
The true contents of the memory operand are implementation defined.
5337
 
5338
This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that the
5339
pattern as a whole acts as an acquire barrier, that is all memory
5340
operations after the pattern do not occur until the lock is acquired.
5341
 
5342
If this pattern is not defined, the operation will be constructed from
5343
a compare-and-swap operation, if defined.
5344
 
5345
@cindex @code{sync_lock_release@var{mode}} instruction pattern
5346
@item @samp{sync_lock_release@var{mode}}
5347
 
5348
This pattern, if defined, releases a lock set by
5349
@code{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}}.  Operand 0 is the memory
5350
that contains the lock; operand 1 is the value to store in the lock.
5351
 
5352
If the target doesn't implement full semantics for
5353
@code{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}}, any value operand which is not
5354
the constant 0 should be rejected with @code{FAIL}, and the true contents
5355
of the memory operand are implementation defined.
5356
 
5357
This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that the
5358
pattern as a whole acts as a release barrier, that is the lock is
5359
released only after all previous memory operations have completed.
5360
 
5361
If this pattern is not defined, then a @code{memory_barrier} pattern
5362
will be emitted, followed by a store of the value to the memory operand.
5363
 
5364
@cindex @code{stack_protect_set} instruction pattern
5365
@item @samp{stack_protect_set}
5366
 
5367
This pattern, if defined, moves a @code{Pmode} value from the memory
5368
in operand 1 to the memory in operand 0 without leaving the value in
5369
a register afterward.  This is to avoid leaking the value some place
5370
that an attacker might use to rewrite the stack guard slot after
5371
having clobbered it.
5372
 
5373
If this pattern is not defined, then a plain move pattern is generated.
5374
 
5375
@cindex @code{stack_protect_test} instruction pattern
5376
@item @samp{stack_protect_test}
5377
 
5378
This pattern, if defined, compares a @code{Pmode} value from the
5379
memory in operand 1 with the memory in operand 0 without leaving the
5380
value in a register afterward and branches to operand 2 if the values
5381
weren't equal.
5382
 
5383
If this pattern is not defined, then a plain compare pattern and
5384
conditional branch pattern is used.
5385
 
5386
@cindex @code{clear_cache} instruction pattern
5387
@item @samp{clear_cache}
5388
 
5389
This pattern, if defined, flushes the instruction cache for a region of
5390
memory.  The region is bounded to by the Pmode pointers in operand 0
5391
inclusive and operand 1 exclusive.
5392
 
5393
If this pattern is not defined, a call to the library function
5394
@code{__clear_cache} is used.
5395
 
5396
@end table
5397
 
5398
@end ifset
5399
@c Each of the following nodes are wrapped in separate
5400
@c "@ifset INTERNALS" to work around memory limits for the default
5401
@c configuration in older tetex distributions.  Known to not work:
5402
@c tetex-1.0.7, known to work: tetex-2.0.2.
5403
@ifset INTERNALS
5404
@node Pattern Ordering
5405
@section When the Order of Patterns Matters
5406
@cindex Pattern Ordering
5407
@cindex Ordering of Patterns
5408
 
5409
Sometimes an insn can match more than one instruction pattern.  Then the
5410
pattern that appears first in the machine description is the one used.
5411
Therefore, more specific patterns (patterns that will match fewer things)
5412
and faster instructions (those that will produce better code when they
5413
do match) should usually go first in the description.
5414
 
5415
In some cases the effect of ordering the patterns can be used to hide
5416
a pattern when it is not valid.  For example, the 68000 has an
5417
instruction for converting a fullword to floating point and another
5418
for converting a byte to floating point.  An instruction converting
5419
an integer to floating point could match either one.  We put the
5420
pattern to convert the fullword first to make sure that one will
5421
be used rather than the other.  (Otherwise a large integer might
5422
be generated as a single-byte immediate quantity, which would not work.)
5423
Instead of using this pattern ordering it would be possible to make the
5424
pattern for convert-a-byte smart enough to deal properly with any
5425
constant value.
5426
 
5427
@end ifset
5428
@ifset INTERNALS
5429
@node Dependent Patterns
5430
@section Interdependence of Patterns
5431
@cindex Dependent Patterns
5432
@cindex Interdependence of Patterns
5433
 
5434
In some cases machines support instructions identical except for the
5435
machine mode of one or more operands.  For example, there may be
5436
``sign-extend halfword'' and ``sign-extend byte'' instructions whose
5437
patterns are
5438
 
5439
@smallexample
5440
(set (match_operand:SI 0 @dots{})
5441
     (extend:SI (match_operand:HI 1 @dots{})))
5442
 
5443
(set (match_operand:SI 0 @dots{})
5444
     (extend:SI (match_operand:QI 1 @dots{})))
5445
@end smallexample
5446
 
5447
@noindent
5448
Constant integers do not specify a machine mode, so an instruction to
5449
extend a constant value could match either pattern.  The pattern it
5450
actually will match is the one that appears first in the file.  For correct
5451
results, this must be the one for the widest possible mode (@code{HImode},
5452
here).  If the pattern matches the @code{QImode} instruction, the results
5453
will be incorrect if the constant value does not actually fit that mode.
5454
 
5455
Such instructions to extend constants are rarely generated because they are
5456
optimized away, but they do occasionally happen in nonoptimized
5457
compilations.
5458
 
5459
If a constraint in a pattern allows a constant, the reload pass may
5460
replace a register with a constant permitted by the constraint in some
5461
cases.  Similarly for memory references.  Because of this substitution,
5462
you should not provide separate patterns for increment and decrement
5463
instructions.  Instead, they should be generated from the same pattern
5464
that supports register-register add insns by examining the operands and
5465
generating the appropriate machine instruction.
5466
 
5467
@end ifset
5468
@ifset INTERNALS
5469
@node Jump Patterns
5470
@section Defining Jump Instruction Patterns
5471
@cindex jump instruction patterns
5472
@cindex defining jump instruction patterns
5473
 
5474
GCC does not assume anything about how the machine realizes jumps.
5475
The machine description should define a single pattern, usually
5476
a @code{define_expand}, which expands to all the required insns.
5477
 
5478
Usually, this would be a comparison insn to set the condition code
5479
and a separate branch insn testing the condition code and branching
5480
or not according to its value.  For many machines, however,
5481
separating compares and branches is limiting, which is why the
5482
more flexible approach with one @code{define_expand} is used in GCC.
5483
The machine description becomes clearer for architectures that
5484
have compare-and-branch instructions but no condition code.  It also
5485
works better when different sets of comparison operators are supported
5486
by different kinds of conditional branches (e.g. integer vs. floating-point),
5487
or by conditional branches with respect to conditional stores.
5488
 
5489
Two separate insns are always used if the machine description represents
5490
a condition code register using the legacy RTL expression @code{(cc0)},
5491
and on most machines that use a separate condition code register
5492
(@pxref{Condition Code}).  For machines that use @code{(cc0)}, in
5493
fact, the set and use of the condition code must be separate and
5494
adjacent@footnote{@code{note} insns can separate them, though.}, thus
5495
allowing flags in @code{cc_status} to be used (@pxref{Condition Code}) and
5496
so that the comparison and branch insns could be located from each other
5497
by using the functions @code{prev_cc0_setter} and @code{next_cc0_user}.
5498
 
5499
Even in this case having a single entry point for conditional branches
5500
is advantageous, because it handles equally well the case where a single
5501
comparison instruction records the results of both signed and unsigned
5502
comparison of the given operands (with the branch insns coming in distinct
5503
signed and unsigned flavors) as in the x86 or SPARC, and the case where
5504
there are distinct signed and unsigned compare instructions and only
5505
one set of conditional branch instructions as in the PowerPC.
5506
 
5507
@end ifset
5508
@ifset INTERNALS
5509
@node Looping Patterns
5510
@section Defining Looping Instruction Patterns
5511
@cindex looping instruction patterns
5512
@cindex defining looping instruction patterns
5513
 
5514
Some machines have special jump instructions that can be utilized to
5515
make loops more efficient.  A common example is the 68000 @samp{dbra}
5516
instruction which performs a decrement of a register and a branch if the
5517
result was greater than zero.  Other machines, in particular digital
5518
signal processors (DSPs), have special block repeat instructions to
5519
provide low-overhead loop support.  For example, the TI TMS320C3x/C4x
5520
DSPs have a block repeat instruction that loads special registers to
5521
mark the top and end of a loop and to count the number of loop
5522
iterations.  This avoids the need for fetching and executing a
5523
@samp{dbra}-like instruction and avoids pipeline stalls associated with
5524
the jump.
5525
 
5526
GCC has three special named patterns to support low overhead looping.
5527
They are @samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero}, @samp{doloop_begin},
5528
and @samp{doloop_end}.  The first pattern,
5529
@samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero}, is not emitted during RTL
5530
generation but may be emitted during the instruction combination phase.
5531
This requires the assistance of the loop optimizer, using information
5532
collected during strength reduction, to reverse a loop to count down to
5533
zero.  Some targets also require the loop optimizer to add a
5534
@code{REG_NONNEG} note to indicate that the iteration count is always
5535
positive.  This is needed if the target performs a signed loop
5536
termination test.  For example, the 68000 uses a pattern similar to the
5537
following for its @code{dbra} instruction:
5538
 
5539
@smallexample
5540
@group
5541
(define_insn "decrement_and_branch_until_zero"
5542
  [(set (pc)
5543
        (if_then_else
5544
          (ge (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "+d*am")
5545
                       (const_int -1))
5546
              (const_int 0))
5547
          (label_ref (match_operand 1 "" ""))
5548
          (pc)))
5549
   (set (match_dup 0)
5550
        (plus:SI (match_dup 0)
5551
                 (const_int -1)))]
5552
  "find_reg_note (insn, REG_NONNEG, 0)"
5553
  "@dots{}")
5554
@end group
5555
@end smallexample
5556
 
5557
Note that since the insn is both a jump insn and has an output, it must
5558
deal with its own reloads, hence the `m' constraints.  Also note that
5559
since this insn is generated by the instruction combination phase
5560
combining two sequential insns together into an implicit parallel insn,
5561
the iteration counter needs to be biased by the same amount as the
5562
decrement operation, in this case @minus{}1.  Note that the following similar
5563
pattern will not be matched by the combiner.
5564
 
5565
@smallexample
5566
@group
5567
(define_insn "decrement_and_branch_until_zero"
5568
  [(set (pc)
5569
        (if_then_else
5570
          (ge (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "+d*am")
5571
              (const_int 1))
5572
          (label_ref (match_operand 1 "" ""))
5573
          (pc)))
5574
   (set (match_dup 0)
5575
        (plus:SI (match_dup 0)
5576
                 (const_int -1)))]
5577
  "find_reg_note (insn, REG_NONNEG, 0)"
5578
  "@dots{}")
5579
@end group
5580
@end smallexample
5581
 
5582
The other two special looping patterns, @samp{doloop_begin} and
5583
@samp{doloop_end}, are emitted by the loop optimizer for certain
5584
well-behaved loops with a finite number of loop iterations using
5585
information collected during strength reduction.
5586
 
5587
The @samp{doloop_end} pattern describes the actual looping instruction
5588
(or the implicit looping operation) and the @samp{doloop_begin} pattern
5589
is an optional companion pattern that can be used for initialization
5590
needed for some low-overhead looping instructions.
5591
 
5592
Note that some machines require the actual looping instruction to be
5593
emitted at the top of the loop (e.g., the TMS320C3x/C4x DSPs).  Emitting
5594
the true RTL for a looping instruction at the top of the loop can cause
5595
problems with flow analysis.  So instead, a dummy @code{doloop} insn is
5596
emitted at the end of the loop.  The machine dependent reorg pass checks
5597
for the presence of this @code{doloop} insn and then searches back to
5598
the top of the loop, where it inserts the true looping insn (provided
5599
there are no instructions in the loop which would cause problems).  Any
5600
additional labels can be emitted at this point.  In addition, if the
5601
desired special iteration counter register was not allocated, this
5602
machine dependent reorg pass could emit a traditional compare and jump
5603
instruction pair.
5604
 
5605
The essential difference between the
5606
@samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero} and the @samp{doloop_end}
5607
patterns is that the loop optimizer allocates an additional pseudo
5608
register for the latter as an iteration counter.  This pseudo register
5609
cannot be used within the loop (i.e., general induction variables cannot
5610
be derived from it), however, in many cases the loop induction variable
5611
may become redundant and removed by the flow pass.
5612
 
5613
 
5614
@end ifset
5615
@ifset INTERNALS
5616
@node Insn Canonicalizations
5617
@section Canonicalization of Instructions
5618
@cindex canonicalization of instructions
5619
@cindex insn canonicalization
5620
 
5621
There are often cases where multiple RTL expressions could represent an
5622
operation performed by a single machine instruction.  This situation is
5623
most commonly encountered with logical, branch, and multiply-accumulate
5624
instructions.  In such cases, the compiler attempts to convert these
5625
multiple RTL expressions into a single canonical form to reduce the
5626
number of insn patterns required.
5627
 
5628
In addition to algebraic simplifications, following canonicalizations
5629
are performed:
5630
 
5631
@itemize @bullet
5632
@item
5633
For commutative and comparison operators, a constant is always made the
5634
second operand.  If a machine only supports a constant as the second
5635
operand, only patterns that match a constant in the second operand need
5636
be supplied.
5637
 
5638
@item
5639
For associative operators, a sequence of operators will always chain
5640
to the left; for instance, only the left operand of an integer @code{plus}
5641
can itself be a @code{plus}.  @code{and}, @code{ior}, @code{xor},
5642
@code{plus}, @code{mult}, @code{smin}, @code{smax}, @code{umin}, and
5643
@code{umax} are associative when applied to integers, and sometimes to
5644
floating-point.
5645
 
5646
@item
5647
@cindex @code{neg}, canonicalization of
5648
@cindex @code{not}, canonicalization of
5649
@cindex @code{mult}, canonicalization of
5650
@cindex @code{plus}, canonicalization of
5651
@cindex @code{minus}, canonicalization of
5652
For these operators, if only one operand is a @code{neg}, @code{not},
5653
@code{mult}, @code{plus}, or @code{minus} expression, it will be the
5654
first operand.
5655
 
5656
@item
5657
In combinations of @code{neg}, @code{mult}, @code{plus}, and
5658
@code{minus}, the @code{neg} operations (if any) will be moved inside
5659
the operations as far as possible.  For instance,
5660
@code{(neg (mult A B))} is canonicalized as @code{(mult (neg A) B)}, but
5661
@code{(plus (mult (neg B) C) A)} is canonicalized as
5662
@code{(minus A (mult B C))}.
5663
 
5664
@cindex @code{compare}, canonicalization of
5665
@item
5666
For the @code{compare} operator, a constant is always the second operand
5667
if the first argument is a condition code register or @code{(cc0)}.
5668
 
5669
@item
5670
An operand of @code{neg}, @code{not}, @code{mult}, @code{plus}, or
5671
@code{minus} is made the first operand under the same conditions as
5672
above.
5673
 
5674
@item
5675
@code{(ltu (plus @var{a} @var{b}) @var{b})} is converted to
5676
@code{(ltu (plus @var{a} @var{b}) @var{a})}. Likewise with @code{geu} instead
5677
of @code{ltu}.
5678
 
5679
@item
5680
@code{(minus @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))} is converted to
5681
@code{(plus @var{x} (const_int @var{-n}))}.
5682
 
5683
@item
5684
Within address computations (i.e., inside @code{mem}), a left shift is
5685
converted into the appropriate multiplication by a power of two.
5686
 
5687
@cindex @code{ior}, canonicalization of
5688
@cindex @code{and}, canonicalization of
5689
@cindex De Morgan's law
5690
@item
5691
De Morgan's Law is used to move bitwise negation inside a bitwise
5692
logical-and or logical-or operation.  If this results in only one
5693
operand being a @code{not} expression, it will be the first one.
5694
 
5695
A machine that has an instruction that performs a bitwise logical-and of one
5696
operand with the bitwise negation of the other should specify the pattern
5697
for that instruction as
5698
 
5699
@smallexample
5700
(define_insn ""
5701
  [(set (match_operand:@var{m} 0 @dots{})
5702
        (and:@var{m} (not:@var{m} (match_operand:@var{m} 1 @dots{}))
5703
                     (match_operand:@var{m} 2 @dots{})))]
5704
  "@dots{}"
5705
  "@dots{}")
5706
@end smallexample
5707
 
5708
@noindent
5709
Similarly, a pattern for a ``NAND'' instruction should be written
5710
 
5711
@smallexample
5712
(define_insn ""
5713
  [(set (match_operand:@var{m} 0 @dots{})
5714
        (ior:@var{m} (not:@var{m} (match_operand:@var{m} 1 @dots{}))
5715
                     (not:@var{m} (match_operand:@var{m} 2 @dots{}))))]
5716
  "@dots{}"
5717
  "@dots{}")
5718
@end smallexample
5719
 
5720
In both cases, it is not necessary to include patterns for the many
5721
logically equivalent RTL expressions.
5722
 
5723
@cindex @code{xor}, canonicalization of
5724
@item
5725
The only possible RTL expressions involving both bitwise exclusive-or
5726
and bitwise negation are @code{(xor:@var{m} @var{x} @var{y})}
5727
and @code{(not:@var{m} (xor:@var{m} @var{x} @var{y}))}.
5728
 
5729
@item
5730
The sum of three items, one of which is a constant, will only appear in
5731
the form
5732
 
5733
@smallexample
5734
(plus:@var{m} (plus:@var{m} @var{x} @var{y}) @var{constant})
5735
@end smallexample
5736
 
5737
@cindex @code{zero_extract}, canonicalization of
5738
@cindex @code{sign_extract}, canonicalization of
5739
@item
5740
Equality comparisons of a group of bits (usually a single bit) with zero
5741
will be written using @code{zero_extract} rather than the equivalent
5742
@code{and} or @code{sign_extract} operations.
5743
 
5744
@end itemize
5745
 
5746
Further canonicalization rules are defined in the function
5747
@code{commutative_operand_precedence} in @file{gcc/rtlanal.c}.
5748
 
5749
@end ifset
5750
@ifset INTERNALS
5751
@node Expander Definitions
5752
@section Defining RTL Sequences for Code Generation
5753
@cindex expander definitions
5754
@cindex code generation RTL sequences
5755
@cindex defining RTL sequences for code generation
5756
 
5757
On some target machines, some standard pattern names for RTL generation
5758
cannot be handled with single insn, but a sequence of RTL insns can
5759
represent them.  For these target machines, you can write a
5760
@code{define_expand} to specify how to generate the sequence of RTL@.
5761
 
5762
@findex define_expand
5763
A @code{define_expand} is an RTL expression that looks almost like a
5764
@code{define_insn}; but, unlike the latter, a @code{define_expand} is used
5765
only for RTL generation and it can produce more than one RTL insn.
5766
 
5767
A @code{define_expand} RTX has four operands:
5768
 
5769
@itemize @bullet
5770
@item
5771
The name.  Each @code{define_expand} must have a name, since the only
5772
use for it is to refer to it by name.
5773
 
5774
@item
5775
The RTL template.  This is a vector of RTL expressions representing
5776
a sequence of separate instructions.  Unlike @code{define_insn}, there
5777
is no implicit surrounding @code{PARALLEL}.
5778
 
5779
@item
5780
The condition, a string containing a C expression.  This expression is
5781
used to express how the availability of this pattern depends on
5782
subclasses of target machine, selected by command-line options when GCC
5783
is run.  This is just like the condition of a @code{define_insn} that
5784
has a standard name.  Therefore, the condition (if present) may not
5785
depend on the data in the insn being matched, but only the
5786
target-machine-type flags.  The compiler needs to test these conditions
5787
during initialization in order to learn exactly which named instructions
5788
are available in a particular run.
5789
 
5790
@item
5791
The preparation statements, a string containing zero or more C
5792
statements which are to be executed before RTL code is generated from
5793
the RTL template.
5794
 
5795
Usually these statements prepare temporary registers for use as
5796
internal operands in the RTL template, but they can also generate RTL
5797
insns directly by calling routines such as @code{emit_insn}, etc.
5798
Any such insns precede the ones that come from the RTL template.
5799
@end itemize
5800
 
5801
Every RTL insn emitted by a @code{define_expand} must match some
5802
@code{define_insn} in the machine description.  Otherwise, the compiler
5803
will crash when trying to generate code for the insn or trying to optimize
5804
it.
5805
 
5806
The RTL template, in addition to controlling generation of RTL insns,
5807
also describes the operands that need to be specified when this pattern
5808
is used.  In particular, it gives a predicate for each operand.
5809
 
5810
A true operand, which needs to be specified in order to generate RTL from
5811
the pattern, should be described with a @code{match_operand} in its first
5812
occurrence in the RTL template.  This enters information on the operand's
5813
predicate into the tables that record such things.  GCC uses the
5814
information to preload the operand into a register if that is required for
5815
valid RTL code.  If the operand is referred to more than once, subsequent
5816
references should use @code{match_dup}.
5817
 
5818
The RTL template may also refer to internal ``operands'' which are
5819
temporary registers or labels used only within the sequence made by the
5820
@code{define_expand}.  Internal operands are substituted into the RTL
5821
template with @code{match_dup}, never with @code{match_operand}.  The
5822
values of the internal operands are not passed in as arguments by the
5823
compiler when it requests use of this pattern.  Instead, they are computed
5824
within the pattern, in the preparation statements.  These statements
5825
compute the values and store them into the appropriate elements of
5826
@code{operands} so that @code{match_dup} can find them.
5827
 
5828
There are two special macros defined for use in the preparation statements:
5829
@code{DONE} and @code{FAIL}.  Use them with a following semicolon,
5830
as a statement.
5831
 
5832
@table @code
5833
 
5834
@findex DONE
5835
@item DONE
5836
Use the @code{DONE} macro to end RTL generation for the pattern.  The
5837
only RTL insns resulting from the pattern on this occasion will be
5838
those already emitted by explicit calls to @code{emit_insn} within the
5839
preparation statements; the RTL template will not be generated.
5840
 
5841
@findex FAIL
5842
@item FAIL
5843
Make the pattern fail on this occasion.  When a pattern fails, it means
5844
that the pattern was not truly available.  The calling routines in the
5845
compiler will try other strategies for code generation using other patterns.
5846
 
5847
Failure is currently supported only for binary (addition, multiplication,
5848
shifting, etc.) and bit-field (@code{extv}, @code{extzv}, and @code{insv})
5849
operations.
5850
@end table
5851
 
5852
If the preparation falls through (invokes neither @code{DONE} nor
5853
@code{FAIL}), then the @code{define_expand} acts like a
5854
@code{define_insn} in that the RTL template is used to generate the
5855
insn.
5856
 
5857
The RTL template is not used for matching, only for generating the
5858
initial insn list.  If the preparation statement always invokes
5859
@code{DONE} or @code{FAIL}, the RTL template may be reduced to a simple
5860
list of operands, such as this example:
5861
 
5862
@smallexample
5863
@group
5864
(define_expand "addsi3"
5865
  [(match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "")
5866
   (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "")
5867
   (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "")]
5868
@end group
5869
@group
5870
  ""
5871
  "
5872
@{
5873
  handle_add (operands[0], operands[1], operands[2]);
5874
  DONE;
5875
@}")
5876
@end group
5877
@end smallexample
5878
 
5879
Here is an example, the definition of left-shift for the SPUR chip:
5880
 
5881
@smallexample
5882
@group
5883
(define_expand "ashlsi3"
5884
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "")
5885
        (ashift:SI
5886
@end group
5887
@group
5888
          (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "")
5889
          (match_operand:SI 2 "nonmemory_operand" "")))]
5890
  ""
5891
  "
5892
@end group
5893
@end smallexample
5894
 
5895
@smallexample
5896
@group
5897
@{
5898
  if (GET_CODE (operands[2]) != CONST_INT
5899
      || (unsigned) INTVAL (operands[2]) > 3)
5900
    FAIL;
5901
@}")
5902
@end group
5903
@end smallexample
5904
 
5905
@noindent
5906
This example uses @code{define_expand} so that it can generate an RTL insn
5907
for shifting when the shift-count is in the supported range of 0 to 3 but
5908
fail in other cases where machine insns aren't available.  When it fails,
5909
the compiler tries another strategy using different patterns (such as, a
5910
library call).
5911
 
5912
If the compiler were able to handle nontrivial condition-strings in
5913
patterns with names, then it would be possible to use a
5914
@code{define_insn} in that case.  Here is another case (zero-extension
5915
on the 68000) which makes more use of the power of @code{define_expand}:
5916
 
5917
@smallexample
5918
(define_expand "zero_extendhisi2"
5919
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "")
5920
        (const_int 0))
5921
   (set (strict_low_part
5922
          (subreg:HI
5923
            (match_dup 0)
5924
            0))
5925
        (match_operand:HI 1 "general_operand" ""))]
5926
  ""
5927
  "operands[1] = make_safe_from (operands[1], operands[0]);")
5928
@end smallexample
5929
 
5930
@noindent
5931
@findex make_safe_from
5932
Here two RTL insns are generated, one to clear the entire output operand
5933
and the other to copy the input operand into its low half.  This sequence
5934
is incorrect if the input operand refers to [the old value of] the output
5935
operand, so the preparation statement makes sure this isn't so.  The
5936
function @code{make_safe_from} copies the @code{operands[1]} into a
5937
temporary register if it refers to @code{operands[0]}.  It does this
5938
by emitting another RTL insn.
5939
 
5940
Finally, a third example shows the use of an internal operand.
5941
Zero-extension on the SPUR chip is done by @code{and}-ing the result
5942
against a halfword mask.  But this mask cannot be represented by a
5943
@code{const_int} because the constant value is too large to be legitimate
5944
on this machine.  So it must be copied into a register with
5945
@code{force_reg} and then the register used in the @code{and}.
5946
 
5947
@smallexample
5948
(define_expand "zero_extendhisi2"
5949
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "")
5950
        (and:SI (subreg:SI
5951
                  (match_operand:HI 1 "register_operand" "")
5952
                  0)
5953
                (match_dup 2)))]
5954
  ""
5955
  "operands[2]
5956
     = force_reg (SImode, GEN_INT (65535)); ")
5957
@end smallexample
5958
 
5959
@emph{Note:} If the @code{define_expand} is used to serve a
5960
standard binary or unary arithmetic operation or a bit-field operation,
5961
then the last insn it generates must not be a @code{code_label},
5962
@code{barrier} or @code{note}.  It must be an @code{insn},
5963
@code{jump_insn} or @code{call_insn}.  If you don't need a real insn
5964
at the end, emit an insn to copy the result of the operation into
5965
itself.  Such an insn will generate no code, but it can avoid problems
5966
in the compiler.
5967
 
5968
@end ifset
5969
@ifset INTERNALS
5970
@node Insn Splitting
5971
@section Defining How to Split Instructions
5972
@cindex insn splitting
5973
@cindex instruction splitting
5974
@cindex splitting instructions
5975
 
5976
There are two cases where you should specify how to split a pattern
5977
into multiple insns.  On machines that have instructions requiring
5978
delay slots (@pxref{Delay Slots}) or that have instructions whose
5979
output is not available for multiple cycles (@pxref{Processor pipeline
5980
description}), the compiler phases that optimize these cases need to
5981
be able to move insns into one-instruction delay slots.  However, some
5982
insns may generate more than one machine instruction.  These insns
5983
cannot be placed into a delay slot.
5984
 
5985
Often you can rewrite the single insn as a list of individual insns,
5986
each corresponding to one machine instruction.  The disadvantage of
5987
doing so is that it will cause the compilation to be slower and require
5988
more space.  If the resulting insns are too complex, it may also
5989
suppress some optimizations.  The compiler splits the insn if there is a
5990
reason to believe that it might improve instruction or delay slot
5991
scheduling.
5992
 
5993
The insn combiner phase also splits putative insns.  If three insns are
5994
merged into one insn with a complex expression that cannot be matched by
5995
some @code{define_insn} pattern, the combiner phase attempts to split
5996
the complex pattern into two insns that are recognized.  Usually it can
5997
break the complex pattern into two patterns by splitting out some
5998
subexpression.  However, in some other cases, such as performing an
5999
addition of a large constant in two insns on a RISC machine, the way to
6000
split the addition into two insns is machine-dependent.
6001
 
6002
@findex define_split
6003
The @code{define_split} definition tells the compiler how to split a
6004
complex insn into several simpler insns.  It looks like this:
6005
 
6006
@smallexample
6007
(define_split
6008
  [@var{insn-pattern}]
6009
  "@var{condition}"
6010
  [@var{new-insn-pattern-1}
6011
   @var{new-insn-pattern-2}
6012
   @dots{}]
6013
  "@var{preparation-statements}")
6014
@end smallexample
6015
 
6016
@var{insn-pattern} is a pattern that needs to be split and
6017
@var{condition} is the final condition to be tested, as in a
6018
@code{define_insn}.  When an insn matching @var{insn-pattern} and
6019
satisfying @var{condition} is found, it is replaced in the insn list
6020
with the insns given by @var{new-insn-pattern-1},
6021
@var{new-insn-pattern-2}, etc.
6022
 
6023
The @var{preparation-statements} are similar to those statements that
6024
are specified for @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions})
6025
and are executed before the new RTL is generated to prepare for the
6026
generated code or emit some insns whose pattern is not fixed.  Unlike
6027
those in @code{define_expand}, however, these statements must not
6028
generate any new pseudo-registers.  Once reload has completed, they also
6029
must not allocate any space in the stack frame.
6030
 
6031
Patterns are matched against @var{insn-pattern} in two different
6032
circumstances.  If an insn needs to be split for delay slot scheduling
6033
or insn scheduling, the insn is already known to be valid, which means
6034
that it must have been matched by some @code{define_insn} and, if
6035
@code{reload_completed} is nonzero, is known to satisfy the constraints
6036
of that @code{define_insn}.  In that case, the new insn patterns must
6037
also be insns that are matched by some @code{define_insn} and, if
6038
@code{reload_completed} is nonzero, must also satisfy the constraints
6039
of those definitions.
6040
 
6041
As an example of this usage of @code{define_split}, consider the following
6042
example from @file{a29k.md}, which splits a @code{sign_extend} from
6043
@code{HImode} to @code{SImode} into a pair of shift insns:
6044
 
6045
@smallexample
6046
(define_split
6047
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "gen_reg_operand" "")
6048
        (sign_extend:SI (match_operand:HI 1 "gen_reg_operand" "")))]
6049
  ""
6050
  [(set (match_dup 0)
6051
        (ashift:SI (match_dup 1)
6052
                   (const_int 16)))
6053
   (set (match_dup 0)
6054
        (ashiftrt:SI (match_dup 0)
6055
                     (const_int 16)))]
6056
  "
6057
@{ operands[1] = gen_lowpart (SImode, operands[1]); @}")
6058
@end smallexample
6059
 
6060
When the combiner phase tries to split an insn pattern, it is always the
6061
case that the pattern is @emph{not} matched by any @code{define_insn}.
6062
The combiner pass first tries to split a single @code{set} expression
6063
and then the same @code{set} expression inside a @code{parallel}, but
6064
followed by a @code{clobber} of a pseudo-reg to use as a scratch
6065
register.  In these cases, the combiner expects exactly two new insn
6066
patterns to be generated.  It will verify that these patterns match some
6067
@code{define_insn} definitions, so you need not do this test in the
6068
@code{define_split} (of course, there is no point in writing a
6069
@code{define_split} that will never produce insns that match).
6070
 
6071
Here is an example of this use of @code{define_split}, taken from
6072
@file{rs6000.md}:
6073
 
6074
@smallexample
6075
(define_split
6076
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "gen_reg_operand" "")
6077
        (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "gen_reg_operand" "")
6078
                 (match_operand:SI 2 "non_add_cint_operand" "")))]
6079
  ""
6080
  [(set (match_dup 0) (plus:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 3)))
6081
   (set (match_dup 0) (plus:SI (match_dup 0) (match_dup 4)))]
6082
"
6083
@{
6084
  int low = INTVAL (operands[2]) & 0xffff;
6085
  int high = (unsigned) INTVAL (operands[2]) >> 16;
6086
 
6087
  if (low & 0x8000)
6088
    high++, low |= 0xffff0000;
6089
 
6090
  operands[3] = GEN_INT (high << 16);
6091
  operands[4] = GEN_INT (low);
6092
@}")
6093
@end smallexample
6094
 
6095
Here the predicate @code{non_add_cint_operand} matches any
6096
@code{const_int} that is @emph{not} a valid operand of a single add
6097
insn.  The add with the smaller displacement is written so that it
6098
can be substituted into the address of a subsequent operation.
6099
 
6100
An example that uses a scratch register, from the same file, generates
6101
an equality comparison of a register and a large constant:
6102
 
6103
@smallexample
6104
(define_split
6105
  [(set (match_operand:CC 0 "cc_reg_operand" "")
6106
        (compare:CC (match_operand:SI 1 "gen_reg_operand" "")
6107
                    (match_operand:SI 2 "non_short_cint_operand" "")))
6108
   (clobber (match_operand:SI 3 "gen_reg_operand" ""))]
6109
  "find_single_use (operands[0], insn, 0)
6110
   && (GET_CODE (*find_single_use (operands[0], insn, 0)) == EQ
6111
       || GET_CODE (*find_single_use (operands[0], insn, 0)) == NE)"
6112
  [(set (match_dup 3) (xor:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 4)))
6113
   (set (match_dup 0) (compare:CC (match_dup 3) (match_dup 5)))]
6114
  "
6115
@{
6116
  /* @r{Get the constant we are comparing against, C, and see what it
6117
     looks like sign-extended to 16 bits.  Then see what constant
6118
     could be XOR'ed with C to get the sign-extended value.}  */
6119
 
6120
  int c = INTVAL (operands[2]);
6121
  int sextc = (c << 16) >> 16;
6122
  int xorv = c ^ sextc;
6123
 
6124
  operands[4] = GEN_INT (xorv);
6125
  operands[5] = GEN_INT (sextc);
6126
@}")
6127
@end smallexample
6128
 
6129
To avoid confusion, don't write a single @code{define_split} that
6130
accepts some insns that match some @code{define_insn} as well as some
6131
insns that don't.  Instead, write two separate @code{define_split}
6132
definitions, one for the insns that are valid and one for the insns that
6133
are not valid.
6134
 
6135
The splitter is allowed to split jump instructions into sequence of
6136
jumps or create new jumps in while splitting non-jump instructions.  As
6137
the central flowgraph and branch prediction information needs to be updated,
6138
several restriction apply.
6139
 
6140
Splitting of jump instruction into sequence that over by another jump
6141
instruction is always valid, as compiler expect identical behavior of new
6142
jump.  When new sequence contains multiple jump instructions or new labels,
6143
more assistance is needed.  Splitter is required to create only unconditional
6144
jumps, or simple conditional jump instructions.  Additionally it must attach a
6145
@code{REG_BR_PROB} note to each conditional jump.  A global variable
6146
@code{split_branch_probability} holds the probability of the original branch in case
6147
it was a simple conditional jump, @minus{}1 otherwise.  To simplify
6148
recomputing of edge frequencies, the new sequence is required to have only
6149
forward jumps to the newly created labels.
6150
 
6151
@findex define_insn_and_split
6152
For the common case where the pattern of a define_split exactly matches the
6153
pattern of a define_insn, use @code{define_insn_and_split}.  It looks like
6154
this:
6155
 
6156
@smallexample
6157
(define_insn_and_split
6158
  [@var{insn-pattern}]
6159
  "@var{condition}"
6160
  "@var{output-template}"
6161
  "@var{split-condition}"
6162
  [@var{new-insn-pattern-1}
6163
   @var{new-insn-pattern-2}
6164
   @dots{}]
6165
  "@var{preparation-statements}"
6166
  [@var{insn-attributes}])
6167
 
6168
@end smallexample
6169
 
6170
@var{insn-pattern}, @var{condition}, @var{output-template}, and
6171
@var{insn-attributes} are used as in @code{define_insn}.  The
6172
@var{new-insn-pattern} vector and the @var{preparation-statements} are used as
6173
in a @code{define_split}.  The @var{split-condition} is also used as in
6174
@code{define_split}, with the additional behavior that if the condition starts
6175
with @samp{&&}, the condition used for the split will be the constructed as a
6176
logical ``and'' of the split condition with the insn condition.  For example,
6177
from i386.md:
6178
 
6179
@smallexample
6180
(define_insn_and_split "zero_extendhisi2_and"
6181
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "=r")
6182
     (zero_extend:SI (match_operand:HI 1 "register_operand" "0")))
6183
   (clobber (reg:CC 17))]
6184
  "TARGET_ZERO_EXTEND_WITH_AND && !optimize_size"
6185
  "#"
6186
  "&& reload_completed"
6187
  [(parallel [(set (match_dup 0)
6188
                   (and:SI (match_dup 0) (const_int 65535)))
6189
              (clobber (reg:CC 17))])]
6190
  ""
6191
  [(set_attr "type" "alu1")])
6192
 
6193
@end smallexample
6194
 
6195
In this case, the actual split condition will be
6196
@samp{TARGET_ZERO_EXTEND_WITH_AND && !optimize_size && reload_completed}.
6197
 
6198
The @code{define_insn_and_split} construction provides exactly the same
6199
functionality as two separate @code{define_insn} and @code{define_split}
6200
patterns.  It exists for compactness, and as a maintenance tool to prevent
6201
having to ensure the two patterns' templates match.
6202
 
6203
@end ifset
6204
@ifset INTERNALS
6205
@node Including Patterns
6206
@section Including Patterns in Machine Descriptions.
6207
@cindex insn includes
6208
 
6209
@findex include
6210
The @code{include} pattern tells the compiler tools where to
6211
look for patterns that are in files other than in the file
6212
@file{.md}.  This is used only at build time and there is no preprocessing allowed.
6213
 
6214
It looks like:
6215
 
6216
@smallexample
6217
 
6218
(include
6219
  @var{pathname})
6220
@end smallexample
6221
 
6222
For example:
6223
 
6224
@smallexample
6225
 
6226
(include "filestuff")
6227
 
6228
@end smallexample
6229
 
6230
Where @var{pathname} is a string that specifies the location of the file,
6231
specifies the include file to be in @file{gcc/config/target/filestuff}.  The
6232
directory @file{gcc/config/target} is regarded as the default directory.
6233
 
6234
 
6235
Machine descriptions may be split up into smaller more manageable subsections
6236
and placed into subdirectories.
6237
 
6238
By specifying:
6239
 
6240
@smallexample
6241
 
6242
(include "BOGUS/filestuff")
6243
 
6244
@end smallexample
6245
 
6246
the include file is specified to be in @file{gcc/config/@var{target}/BOGUS/filestuff}.
6247
 
6248
Specifying an absolute path for the include file such as;
6249
@smallexample
6250
 
6251
(include "/u2/BOGUS/filestuff")
6252
 
6253
@end smallexample
6254
is permitted but is not encouraged.
6255
 
6256
@subsection RTL Generation Tool Options for Directory Search
6257
@cindex directory options .md
6258
@cindex options, directory search
6259
@cindex search options
6260
 
6261
The @option{-I@var{dir}} option specifies directories to search for machine descriptions.
6262
For example:
6263
 
6264
@smallexample
6265
 
6266
genrecog -I/p1/abc/proc1 -I/p2/abcd/pro2 target.md
6267
 
6268
@end smallexample
6269
 
6270
 
6271
Add the directory @var{dir} to the head of the list of directories to be
6272
searched for header files.  This can be used to override a system machine definition
6273
file, substituting your own version, since these directories are
6274
searched before the default machine description file directories.  If you use more than
6275
one @option{-I} option, the directories are scanned in left-to-right
6276
order; the standard default directory come after.
6277
 
6278
 
6279
@end ifset
6280
@ifset INTERNALS
6281
@node Peephole Definitions
6282
@section Machine-Specific Peephole Optimizers
6283
@cindex peephole optimizer definitions
6284
@cindex defining peephole optimizers
6285
 
6286
In addition to instruction patterns the @file{md} file may contain
6287
definitions of machine-specific peephole optimizations.
6288
 
6289
The combiner does not notice certain peephole optimizations when the data
6290
flow in the program does not suggest that it should try them.  For example,
6291
sometimes two consecutive insns related in purpose can be combined even
6292
though the second one does not appear to use a register computed in the
6293
first one.  A machine-specific peephole optimizer can detect such
6294
opportunities.
6295
 
6296
There are two forms of peephole definitions that may be used.  The
6297
original @code{define_peephole} is run at assembly output time to
6298
match insns and substitute assembly text.  Use of @code{define_peephole}
6299
is deprecated.
6300
 
6301
A newer @code{define_peephole2} matches insns and substitutes new
6302
insns.  The @code{peephole2} pass is run after register allocation
6303
but before scheduling, which may result in much better code for
6304
targets that do scheduling.
6305
 
6306
@menu
6307
* define_peephole::     RTL to Text Peephole Optimizers
6308
* define_peephole2::    RTL to RTL Peephole Optimizers
6309
@end menu
6310
 
6311
@end ifset
6312
@ifset INTERNALS
6313
@node define_peephole
6314
@subsection RTL to Text Peephole Optimizers
6315
@findex define_peephole
6316
 
6317
@need 1000
6318
A definition looks like this:
6319
 
6320
@smallexample
6321
(define_peephole
6322
  [@var{insn-pattern-1}
6323
   @var{insn-pattern-2}
6324
   @dots{}]
6325
  "@var{condition}"
6326
  "@var{template}"
6327
  "@var{optional-insn-attributes}")
6328
@end smallexample
6329
 
6330
@noindent
6331
The last string operand may be omitted if you are not using any
6332
machine-specific information in this machine description.  If present,
6333
it must obey the same rules as in a @code{define_insn}.
6334
 
6335
In this skeleton, @var{insn-pattern-1} and so on are patterns to match
6336
consecutive insns.  The optimization applies to a sequence of insns when
6337
@var{insn-pattern-1} matches the first one, @var{insn-pattern-2} matches
6338
the next, and so on.
6339
 
6340
Each of the insns matched by a peephole must also match a
6341
@code{define_insn}.  Peepholes are checked only at the last stage just
6342
before code generation, and only optionally.  Therefore, any insn which
6343
would match a peephole but no @code{define_insn} will cause a crash in code
6344
generation in an unoptimized compilation, or at various optimization
6345
stages.
6346
 
6347
The operands of the insns are matched with @code{match_operands},
6348
@code{match_operator}, and @code{match_dup}, as usual.  What is not
6349
usual is that the operand numbers apply to all the insn patterns in the
6350
definition.  So, you can check for identical operands in two insns by
6351
using @code{match_operand} in one insn and @code{match_dup} in the
6352
other.
6353
 
6354
The operand constraints used in @code{match_operand} patterns do not have
6355
any direct effect on the applicability of the peephole, but they will
6356
be validated afterward, so make sure your constraints are general enough
6357
to apply whenever the peephole matches.  If the peephole matches
6358
but the constraints are not satisfied, the compiler will crash.
6359
 
6360
It is safe to omit constraints in all the operands of the peephole; or
6361
you can write constraints which serve as a double-check on the criteria
6362
previously tested.
6363
 
6364
Once a sequence of insns matches the patterns, the @var{condition} is
6365
checked.  This is a C expression which makes the final decision whether to
6366
perform the optimization (we do so if the expression is nonzero).  If
6367
@var{condition} is omitted (in other words, the string is empty) then the
6368
optimization is applied to every sequence of insns that matches the
6369
patterns.
6370
 
6371
The defined peephole optimizations are applied after register allocation
6372
is complete.  Therefore, the peephole definition can check which
6373
operands have ended up in which kinds of registers, just by looking at
6374
the operands.
6375
 
6376
@findex prev_active_insn
6377
The way to refer to the operands in @var{condition} is to write
6378
@code{operands[@var{i}]} for operand number @var{i} (as matched by
6379
@code{(match_operand @var{i} @dots{})}).  Use the variable @code{insn}
6380
to refer to the last of the insns being matched; use
6381
@code{prev_active_insn} to find the preceding insns.
6382
 
6383
@findex dead_or_set_p
6384
When optimizing computations with intermediate results, you can use
6385
@var{condition} to match only when the intermediate results are not used
6386
elsewhere.  Use the C expression @code{dead_or_set_p (@var{insn},
6387
@var{op})}, where @var{insn} is the insn in which you expect the value
6388
to be used for the last time (from the value of @code{insn}, together
6389
with use of @code{prev_nonnote_insn}), and @var{op} is the intermediate
6390
value (from @code{operands[@var{i}]}).
6391
 
6392
Applying the optimization means replacing the sequence of insns with one
6393
new insn.  The @var{template} controls ultimate output of assembler code
6394
for this combined insn.  It works exactly like the template of a
6395
@code{define_insn}.  Operand numbers in this template are the same ones
6396
used in matching the original sequence of insns.
6397
 
6398
The result of a defined peephole optimizer does not need to match any of
6399
the insn patterns in the machine description; it does not even have an
6400
opportunity to match them.  The peephole optimizer definition itself serves
6401
as the insn pattern to control how the insn is output.
6402
 
6403
Defined peephole optimizers are run as assembler code is being output,
6404
so the insns they produce are never combined or rearranged in any way.
6405
 
6406
Here is an example, taken from the 68000 machine description:
6407
 
6408
@smallexample
6409
(define_peephole
6410
  [(set (reg:SI 15) (plus:SI (reg:SI 15) (const_int 4)))
6411
   (set (match_operand:DF 0 "register_operand" "=f")
6412
        (match_operand:DF 1 "register_operand" "ad"))]
6413
  "FP_REG_P (operands[0]) && ! FP_REG_P (operands[1])"
6414
@{
6415
  rtx xoperands[2];
6416
  xoperands[1] = gen_rtx_REG (SImode, REGNO (operands[1]) + 1);
6417
#ifdef MOTOROLA
6418
  output_asm_insn ("move.l %1,(sp)", xoperands);
6419
  output_asm_insn ("move.l %1,-(sp)", operands);
6420
  return "fmove.d (sp)+,%0";
6421
#else
6422
  output_asm_insn ("movel %1,sp@@", xoperands);
6423
  output_asm_insn ("movel %1,sp@@-", operands);
6424
  return "fmoved sp@@+,%0";
6425
#endif
6426
@})
6427
@end smallexample
6428
 
6429
@need 1000
6430
The effect of this optimization is to change
6431
 
6432
@smallexample
6433
@group
6434
jbsr _foobar
6435
addql #4,sp
6436
movel d1,sp@@-
6437
movel d0,sp@@-
6438
fmoved sp@@+,fp0
6439
@end group
6440
@end smallexample
6441
 
6442
@noindent
6443
into
6444
 
6445
@smallexample
6446
@group
6447
jbsr _foobar
6448
movel d1,sp@@
6449
movel d0,sp@@-
6450
fmoved sp@@+,fp0
6451
@end group
6452
@end smallexample
6453
 
6454
@ignore
6455
@findex CC_REVERSED
6456
If a peephole matches a sequence including one or more jump insns, you must
6457
take account of the flags such as @code{CC_REVERSED} which specify that the
6458
condition codes are represented in an unusual manner.  The compiler
6459
automatically alters any ordinary conditional jumps which occur in such
6460
situations, but the compiler cannot alter jumps which have been replaced by
6461
peephole optimizations.  So it is up to you to alter the assembler code
6462
that the peephole produces.  Supply C code to write the assembler output,
6463
and in this C code check the condition code status flags and change the
6464
assembler code as appropriate.
6465
@end ignore
6466
 
6467
@var{insn-pattern-1} and so on look @emph{almost} like the second
6468
operand of @code{define_insn}.  There is one important difference: the
6469
second operand of @code{define_insn} consists of one or more RTX's
6470
enclosed in square brackets.  Usually, there is only one: then the same
6471
action can be written as an element of a @code{define_peephole}.  But
6472
when there are multiple actions in a @code{define_insn}, they are
6473
implicitly enclosed in a @code{parallel}.  Then you must explicitly
6474
write the @code{parallel}, and the square brackets within it, in the
6475
@code{define_peephole}.  Thus, if an insn pattern looks like this,
6476
 
6477
@smallexample
6478
(define_insn "divmodsi4"
6479
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=d")
6480
        (div:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0")
6481
                (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "dmsK")))
6482
   (set (match_operand:SI 3 "general_operand" "=d")
6483
        (mod:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 2)))]
6484
  "TARGET_68020"
6485
  "divsl%.l %2,%3:%0")
6486
@end smallexample
6487
 
6488
@noindent
6489
then the way to mention this insn in a peephole is as follows:
6490
 
6491
@smallexample
6492
(define_peephole
6493
  [@dots{}
6494
   (parallel
6495
    [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=d")
6496
          (div:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0")
6497
                  (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "dmsK")))
6498
     (set (match_operand:SI 3 "general_operand" "=d")
6499
          (mod:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 2)))])
6500
   @dots{}]
6501
  @dots{})
6502
@end smallexample
6503
 
6504
@end ifset
6505
@ifset INTERNALS
6506
@node define_peephole2
6507
@subsection RTL to RTL Peephole Optimizers
6508
@findex define_peephole2
6509
 
6510
The @code{define_peephole2} definition tells the compiler how to
6511
substitute one sequence of instructions for another sequence,
6512
what additional scratch registers may be needed and what their
6513
lifetimes must be.
6514
 
6515
@smallexample
6516
(define_peephole2
6517
  [@var{insn-pattern-1}
6518
   @var{insn-pattern-2}
6519
   @dots{}]
6520
  "@var{condition}"
6521
  [@var{new-insn-pattern-1}
6522
   @var{new-insn-pattern-2}
6523
   @dots{}]
6524
  "@var{preparation-statements}")
6525
@end smallexample
6526
 
6527
The definition is almost identical to @code{define_split}
6528
(@pxref{Insn Splitting}) except that the pattern to match is not a
6529
single instruction, but a sequence of instructions.
6530
 
6531
It is possible to request additional scratch registers for use in the
6532
output template.  If appropriate registers are not free, the pattern
6533
will simply not match.
6534
 
6535
@findex match_scratch
6536
@findex match_dup
6537
Scratch registers are requested with a @code{match_scratch} pattern at
6538
the top level of the input pattern.  The allocated register (initially) will
6539
be dead at the point requested within the original sequence.  If the scratch
6540
is used at more than a single point, a @code{match_dup} pattern at the
6541
top level of the input pattern marks the last position in the input sequence
6542
at which the register must be available.
6543
 
6544
Here is an example from the IA-32 machine description:
6545
 
6546
@smallexample
6547
(define_peephole2
6548
  [(match_scratch:SI 2 "r")
6549
   (parallel [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "")
6550
                   (match_operator:SI 3 "arith_or_logical_operator"
6551
                     [(match_dup 0)
6552
                      (match_operand:SI 1 "memory_operand" "")]))
6553
              (clobber (reg:CC 17))])]
6554
  "! optimize_size && ! TARGET_READ_MODIFY"
6555
  [(set (match_dup 2) (match_dup 1))
6556
   (parallel [(set (match_dup 0)
6557
                   (match_op_dup 3 [(match_dup 0) (match_dup 2)]))
6558
              (clobber (reg:CC 17))])]
6559
  "")
6560
@end smallexample
6561
 
6562
@noindent
6563
This pattern tries to split a load from its use in the hopes that we'll be
6564
able to schedule around the memory load latency.  It allocates a single
6565
@code{SImode} register of class @code{GENERAL_REGS} (@code{"r"}) that needs
6566
to be live only at the point just before the arithmetic.
6567
 
6568
A real example requiring extended scratch lifetimes is harder to come by,
6569
so here's a silly made-up example:
6570
 
6571
@smallexample
6572
(define_peephole2
6573
  [(match_scratch:SI 4 "r")
6574
   (set (match_operand:SI 0 "" "") (match_operand:SI 1 "" ""))
6575
   (set (match_operand:SI 2 "" "") (match_dup 1))
6576
   (match_dup 4)
6577
   (set (match_operand:SI 3 "" "") (match_dup 1))]
6578
  "/* @r{determine 1 does not overlap 0 and 2} */"
6579
  [(set (match_dup 4) (match_dup 1))
6580
   (set (match_dup 0) (match_dup 4))
6581
   (set (match_dup 2) (match_dup 4))]
6582
   (set (match_dup 3) (match_dup 4))]
6583
  "")
6584
@end smallexample
6585
 
6586
@noindent
6587
If we had not added the @code{(match_dup 4)} in the middle of the input
6588
sequence, it might have been the case that the register we chose at the
6589
beginning of the sequence is killed by the first or second @code{set}.
6590
 
6591
@end ifset
6592
@ifset INTERNALS
6593
@node Insn Attributes
6594
@section Instruction Attributes
6595
@cindex insn attributes
6596
@cindex instruction attributes
6597
 
6598
In addition to describing the instruction supported by the target machine,
6599
the @file{md} file also defines a group of @dfn{attributes} and a set of
6600
values for each.  Every generated insn is assigned a value for each attribute.
6601
One possible attribute would be the effect that the insn has on the machine's
6602
condition code.  This attribute can then be used by @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}
6603
to track the condition codes.
6604
 
6605
@menu
6606
* Defining Attributes:: Specifying attributes and their values.
6607
* Expressions::         Valid expressions for attribute values.
6608
* Tagging Insns::       Assigning attribute values to insns.
6609
* Attr Example::        An example of assigning attributes.
6610
* Insn Lengths::        Computing the length of insns.
6611
* Constant Attributes:: Defining attributes that are constant.
6612
* Delay Slots::         Defining delay slots required for a machine.
6613
* Processor pipeline description:: Specifying information for insn scheduling.
6614
@end menu
6615
 
6616
@end ifset
6617
@ifset INTERNALS
6618
@node Defining Attributes
6619
@subsection Defining Attributes and their Values
6620
@cindex defining attributes and their values
6621
@cindex attributes, defining
6622
 
6623
@findex define_attr
6624
The @code{define_attr} expression is used to define each attribute required
6625
by the target machine.  It looks like:
6626
 
6627
@smallexample
6628
(define_attr @var{name} @var{list-of-values} @var{default})
6629
@end smallexample
6630
 
6631
@var{name} is a string specifying the name of the attribute being defined.
6632
 
6633
@var{list-of-values} is either a string that specifies a comma-separated
6634
list of values that can be assigned to the attribute, or a null string to
6635
indicate that the attribute takes numeric values.
6636
 
6637
@var{default} is an attribute expression that gives the value of this
6638
attribute for insns that match patterns whose definition does not include
6639
an explicit value for this attribute.  @xref{Attr Example}, for more
6640
information on the handling of defaults.  @xref{Constant Attributes},
6641
for information on attributes that do not depend on any particular insn.
6642
 
6643
@findex insn-attr.h
6644
For each defined attribute, a number of definitions are written to the
6645
@file{insn-attr.h} file.  For cases where an explicit set of values is
6646
specified for an attribute, the following are defined:
6647
 
6648
@itemize @bullet
6649
@item
6650
A @samp{#define} is written for the symbol @samp{HAVE_ATTR_@var{name}}.
6651
 
6652
@item
6653
An enumerated class is defined for @samp{attr_@var{name}} with
6654
elements of the form @samp{@var{upper-name}_@var{upper-value}} where
6655
the attribute name and value are first converted to uppercase.
6656
 
6657
@item
6658
A function @samp{get_attr_@var{name}} is defined that is passed an insn and
6659
returns the attribute value for that insn.
6660
@end itemize
6661
 
6662
For example, if the following is present in the @file{md} file:
6663
 
6664
@smallexample
6665
(define_attr "type" "branch,fp,load,store,arith" @dots{})
6666
@end smallexample
6667
 
6668
@noindent
6669
the following lines will be written to the file @file{insn-attr.h}.
6670
 
6671
@smallexample
6672
#define HAVE_ATTR_type
6673
enum attr_type @{TYPE_BRANCH, TYPE_FP, TYPE_LOAD,
6674
                 TYPE_STORE, TYPE_ARITH@};
6675
extern enum attr_type get_attr_type ();
6676
@end smallexample
6677
 
6678
If the attribute takes numeric values, no @code{enum} type will be
6679
defined and the function to obtain the attribute's value will return
6680
@code{int}.
6681
 
6682
There are attributes which are tied to a specific meaning.  These
6683
attributes are not free to use for other purposes:
6684
 
6685
@table @code
6686
@item length
6687
The @code{length} attribute is used to calculate the length of emitted
6688
code chunks.  This is especially important when verifying branch
6689
distances. @xref{Insn Lengths}.
6690
 
6691
@item enabled
6692
The @code{enabled} attribute can be defined to prevent certain
6693
alternatives of an insn definition from being used during code
6694
generation. @xref{Disable Insn Alternatives}.
6695
 
6696
@end table
6697
 
6698
@end ifset
6699
@ifset INTERNALS
6700
@node Expressions
6701
@subsection Attribute Expressions
6702
@cindex attribute expressions
6703
 
6704
RTL expressions used to define attributes use the codes described above
6705
plus a few specific to attribute definitions, to be discussed below.
6706
Attribute value expressions must have one of the following forms:
6707
 
6708
@table @code
6709
@cindex @code{const_int} and attributes
6710
@item (const_int @var{i})
6711
The integer @var{i} specifies the value of a numeric attribute.  @var{i}
6712
must be non-negative.
6713
 
6714
The value of a numeric attribute can be specified either with a
6715
@code{const_int}, or as an integer represented as a string in
6716
@code{const_string}, @code{eq_attr} (see below), @code{attr},
6717
@code{symbol_ref}, simple arithmetic expressions, and @code{set_attr}
6718
overrides on specific instructions (@pxref{Tagging Insns}).
6719
 
6720
@cindex @code{const_string} and attributes
6721
@item (const_string @var{value})
6722
The string @var{value} specifies a constant attribute value.
6723
If @var{value} is specified as @samp{"*"}, it means that the default value of
6724
the attribute is to be used for the insn containing this expression.
6725
@samp{"*"} obviously cannot be used in the @var{default} expression
6726
of a @code{define_attr}.
6727
 
6728
If the attribute whose value is being specified is numeric, @var{value}
6729
must be a string containing a non-negative integer (normally
6730
@code{const_int} would be used in this case).  Otherwise, it must
6731
contain one of the valid values for the attribute.
6732
 
6733
@cindex @code{if_then_else} and attributes
6734
@item (if_then_else @var{test} @var{true-value} @var{false-value})
6735
@var{test} specifies an attribute test, whose format is defined below.
6736
The value of this expression is @var{true-value} if @var{test} is true,
6737
otherwise it is @var{false-value}.
6738
 
6739
@cindex @code{cond} and attributes
6740
@item (cond [@var{test1} @var{value1} @dots{}] @var{default})
6741
The first operand of this expression is a vector containing an even
6742
number of expressions and consisting of pairs of @var{test} and @var{value}
6743
expressions.  The value of the @code{cond} expression is that of the
6744
@var{value} corresponding to the first true @var{test} expression.  If
6745
none of the @var{test} expressions are true, the value of the @code{cond}
6746
expression is that of the @var{default} expression.
6747
@end table
6748
 
6749
@var{test} expressions can have one of the following forms:
6750
 
6751
@table @code
6752
@cindex @code{const_int} and attribute tests
6753
@item (const_int @var{i})
6754
This test is true if @var{i} is nonzero and false otherwise.
6755
 
6756
@cindex @code{not} and attributes
6757
@cindex @code{ior} and attributes
6758
@cindex @code{and} and attributes
6759
@item (not @var{test})
6760
@itemx (ior @var{test1} @var{test2})
6761
@itemx (and @var{test1} @var{test2})
6762
These tests are true if the indicated logical function is true.
6763
 
6764
@cindex @code{match_operand} and attributes
6765
@item (match_operand:@var{m} @var{n} @var{pred} @var{constraints})
6766
This test is true if operand @var{n} of the insn whose attribute value
6767
is being determined has mode @var{m} (this part of the test is ignored
6768
if @var{m} is @code{VOIDmode}) and the function specified by the string
6769
@var{pred} returns a nonzero value when passed operand @var{n} and mode
6770
@var{m} (this part of the test is ignored if @var{pred} is the null
6771
string).
6772
 
6773
The @var{constraints} operand is ignored and should be the null string.
6774
 
6775
@cindex @code{le} and attributes
6776
@cindex @code{leu} and attributes
6777
@cindex @code{lt} and attributes
6778
@cindex @code{gt} and attributes
6779
@cindex @code{gtu} and attributes
6780
@cindex @code{ge} and attributes
6781
@cindex @code{geu} and attributes
6782
@cindex @code{ne} and attributes
6783
@cindex @code{eq} and attributes
6784
@cindex @code{plus} and attributes
6785
@cindex @code{minus} and attributes
6786
@cindex @code{mult} and attributes
6787
@cindex @code{div} and attributes
6788
@cindex @code{mod} and attributes
6789
@cindex @code{abs} and attributes
6790
@cindex @code{neg} and attributes
6791
@cindex @code{ashift} and attributes
6792
@cindex @code{lshiftrt} and attributes
6793
@cindex @code{ashiftrt} and attributes
6794
@item (le @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6795
@itemx (leu @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6796
@itemx (lt @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6797
@itemx (ltu @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6798
@itemx (gt @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6799
@itemx (gtu @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6800
@itemx (ge @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6801
@itemx (geu @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6802
@itemx (ne @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6803
@itemx (eq @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
6804
These tests are true if the indicated comparison of the two arithmetic
6805
expressions is true.  Arithmetic expressions are formed with
6806
@code{plus}, @code{minus}, @code{mult}, @code{div}, @code{mod},
6807
@code{abs}, @code{neg}, @code{and}, @code{ior}, @code{xor}, @code{not},
6808
@code{ashift}, @code{lshiftrt}, and @code{ashiftrt} expressions.
6809
 
6810
@findex get_attr
6811
@code{const_int} and @code{symbol_ref} are always valid terms (@pxref{Insn
6812
Lengths},for additional forms).  @code{symbol_ref} is a string
6813
denoting a C expression that yields an @code{int} when evaluated by the
6814
@samp{get_attr_@dots{}} routine.  It should normally be a global
6815
variable.
6816
 
6817
@findex eq_attr
6818
@item (eq_attr @var{name} @var{value})
6819
@var{name} is a string specifying the name of an attribute.
6820
 
6821
@var{value} is a string that is either a valid value for attribute
6822
@var{name}, a comma-separated list of values, or @samp{!} followed by a
6823
value or list.  If @var{value} does not begin with a @samp{!}, this
6824
test is true if the value of the @var{name} attribute of the current
6825
insn is in the list specified by @var{value}.  If @var{value} begins
6826
with a @samp{!}, this test is true if the attribute's value is
6827
@emph{not} in the specified list.
6828
 
6829
For example,
6830
 
6831
@smallexample
6832
(eq_attr "type" "load,store")
6833
@end smallexample
6834
 
6835
@noindent
6836
is equivalent to
6837
 
6838
@smallexample
6839
(ior (eq_attr "type" "load") (eq_attr "type" "store"))
6840
@end smallexample
6841
 
6842
If @var{name} specifies an attribute of @samp{alternative}, it refers to the
6843
value of the compiler variable @code{which_alternative}
6844
(@pxref{Output Statement}) and the values must be small integers.  For
6845
example,
6846
 
6847
@smallexample
6848
(eq_attr "alternative" "2,3")
6849
@end smallexample
6850
 
6851
@noindent
6852
is equivalent to
6853
 
6854
@smallexample
6855
(ior (eq (symbol_ref "which_alternative") (const_int 2))
6856
     (eq (symbol_ref "which_alternative") (const_int 3)))
6857
@end smallexample
6858
 
6859
Note that, for most attributes, an @code{eq_attr} test is simplified in cases
6860
where the value of the attribute being tested is known for all insns matching
6861
a particular pattern.  This is by far the most common case.
6862
 
6863
@findex attr_flag
6864
@item (attr_flag @var{name})
6865
The value of an @code{attr_flag} expression is true if the flag
6866
specified by @var{name} is true for the @code{insn} currently being
6867
scheduled.
6868
 
6869
@var{name} is a string specifying one of a fixed set of flags to test.
6870
Test the flags @code{forward} and @code{backward} to determine the
6871
direction of a conditional branch.  Test the flags @code{very_likely},
6872
@code{likely}, @code{very_unlikely}, and @code{unlikely} to determine
6873
if a conditional branch is expected to be taken.
6874
 
6875
If the @code{very_likely} flag is true, then the @code{likely} flag is also
6876
true.  Likewise for the @code{very_unlikely} and @code{unlikely} flags.
6877
 
6878
This example describes a conditional branch delay slot which
6879
can be nullified for forward branches that are taken (annul-true) or
6880
for backward branches which are not taken (annul-false).
6881
 
6882
@smallexample
6883
(define_delay (eq_attr "type" "cbranch")
6884
  [(eq_attr "in_branch_delay" "true")
6885
   (and (eq_attr "in_branch_delay" "true")
6886
        (attr_flag "forward"))
6887
   (and (eq_attr "in_branch_delay" "true")
6888
        (attr_flag "backward"))])
6889
@end smallexample
6890
 
6891
The @code{forward} and @code{backward} flags are false if the current
6892
@code{insn} being scheduled is not a conditional branch.
6893
 
6894
The @code{very_likely} and @code{likely} flags are true if the
6895
@code{insn} being scheduled is not a conditional branch.
6896
The @code{very_unlikely} and @code{unlikely} flags are false if the
6897
@code{insn} being scheduled is not a conditional branch.
6898
 
6899
@code{attr_flag} is only used during delay slot scheduling and has no
6900
meaning to other passes of the compiler.
6901
 
6902
@findex attr
6903
@item (attr @var{name})
6904
The value of another attribute is returned.  This is most useful
6905
for numeric attributes, as @code{eq_attr} and @code{attr_flag}
6906
produce more efficient code for non-numeric attributes.
6907
@end table
6908
 
6909
@end ifset
6910
@ifset INTERNALS
6911
@node Tagging Insns
6912
@subsection Assigning Attribute Values to Insns
6913
@cindex tagging insns
6914
@cindex assigning attribute values to insns
6915
 
6916
The value assigned to an attribute of an insn is primarily determined by
6917
which pattern is matched by that insn (or which @code{define_peephole}
6918
generated it).  Every @code{define_insn} and @code{define_peephole} can
6919
have an optional last argument to specify the values of attributes for
6920
matching insns.  The value of any attribute not specified in a particular
6921
insn is set to the default value for that attribute, as specified in its
6922
@code{define_attr}.  Extensive use of default values for attributes
6923
permits the specification of the values for only one or two attributes
6924
in the definition of most insn patterns, as seen in the example in the
6925
next section.
6926
 
6927
The optional last argument of @code{define_insn} and
6928
@code{define_peephole} is a vector of expressions, each of which defines
6929
the value for a single attribute.  The most general way of assigning an
6930
attribute's value is to use a @code{set} expression whose first operand is an
6931
@code{attr} expression giving the name of the attribute being set.  The
6932
second operand of the @code{set} is an attribute expression
6933
(@pxref{Expressions}) giving the value of the attribute.
6934
 
6935
When the attribute value depends on the @samp{alternative} attribute
6936
(i.e., which is the applicable alternative in the constraint of the
6937
insn), the @code{set_attr_alternative} expression can be used.  It
6938
allows the specification of a vector of attribute expressions, one for
6939
each alternative.
6940
 
6941
@findex set_attr
6942
When the generality of arbitrary attribute expressions is not required,
6943
the simpler @code{set_attr} expression can be used, which allows
6944
specifying a string giving either a single attribute value or a list
6945
of attribute values, one for each alternative.
6946
 
6947
The form of each of the above specifications is shown below.  In each case,
6948
@var{name} is a string specifying the attribute to be set.
6949
 
6950
@table @code
6951
@item (set_attr @var{name} @var{value-string})
6952
@var{value-string} is either a string giving the desired attribute value,
6953
or a string containing a comma-separated list giving the values for
6954
succeeding alternatives.  The number of elements must match the number
6955
of alternatives in the constraint of the insn pattern.
6956
 
6957
Note that it may be useful to specify @samp{*} for some alternative, in
6958
which case the attribute will assume its default value for insns matching
6959
that alternative.
6960
 
6961
@findex set_attr_alternative
6962
@item (set_attr_alternative @var{name} [@var{value1} @var{value2} @dots{}])
6963
Depending on the alternative of the insn, the value will be one of the
6964
specified values.  This is a shorthand for using a @code{cond} with
6965
tests on the @samp{alternative} attribute.
6966
 
6967
@findex attr
6968
@item (set (attr @var{name}) @var{value})
6969
The first operand of this @code{set} must be the special RTL expression
6970
@code{attr}, whose sole operand is a string giving the name of the
6971
attribute being set.  @var{value} is the value of the attribute.
6972
@end table
6973
 
6974
The following shows three different ways of representing the same
6975
attribute value specification:
6976
 
6977
@smallexample
6978
(set_attr "type" "load,store,arith")
6979
 
6980
(set_attr_alternative "type"
6981
                      [(const_string "load") (const_string "store")
6982
                       (const_string "arith")])
6983
 
6984
(set (attr "type")
6985
     (cond [(eq_attr "alternative" "1") (const_string "load")
6986
            (eq_attr "alternative" "2") (const_string "store")]
6987
           (const_string "arith")))
6988
@end smallexample
6989
 
6990
@need 1000
6991
@findex define_asm_attributes
6992
The @code{define_asm_attributes} expression provides a mechanism to
6993
specify the attributes assigned to insns produced from an @code{asm}
6994
statement.  It has the form:
6995
 
6996
@smallexample
6997
(define_asm_attributes [@var{attr-sets}])
6998
@end smallexample
6999
 
7000
@noindent
7001
where @var{attr-sets} is specified the same as for both the
7002
@code{define_insn} and the @code{define_peephole} expressions.
7003
 
7004
These values will typically be the ``worst case'' attribute values.  For
7005
example, they might indicate that the condition code will be clobbered.
7006
 
7007
A specification for a @code{length} attribute is handled specially.  The
7008
way to compute the length of an @code{asm} insn is to multiply the
7009
length specified in the expression @code{define_asm_attributes} by the
7010
number of machine instructions specified in the @code{asm} statement,
7011
determined by counting the number of semicolons and newlines in the
7012
string.  Therefore, the value of the @code{length} attribute specified
7013
in a @code{define_asm_attributes} should be the maximum possible length
7014
of a single machine instruction.
7015
 
7016
@end ifset
7017
@ifset INTERNALS
7018
@node Attr Example
7019
@subsection Example of Attribute Specifications
7020
@cindex attribute specifications example
7021
@cindex attribute specifications
7022
 
7023
The judicious use of defaulting is important in the efficient use of
7024
insn attributes.  Typically, insns are divided into @dfn{types} and an
7025
attribute, customarily called @code{type}, is used to represent this
7026
value.  This attribute is normally used only to define the default value
7027
for other attributes.  An example will clarify this usage.
7028
 
7029
Assume we have a RISC machine with a condition code and in which only
7030
full-word operations are performed in registers.  Let us assume that we
7031
can divide all insns into loads, stores, (integer) arithmetic
7032
operations, floating point operations, and branches.
7033
 
7034
Here we will concern ourselves with determining the effect of an insn on
7035
the condition code and will limit ourselves to the following possible
7036
effects:  The condition code can be set unpredictably (clobbered), not
7037
be changed, be set to agree with the results of the operation, or only
7038
changed if the item previously set into the condition code has been
7039
modified.
7040
 
7041
Here is part of a sample @file{md} file for such a machine:
7042
 
7043
@smallexample
7044
(define_attr "type" "load,store,arith,fp,branch" (const_string "arith"))
7045
 
7046
(define_attr "cc" "clobber,unchanged,set,change0"
7047
             (cond [(eq_attr "type" "load")
7048
                        (const_string "change0")
7049
                    (eq_attr "type" "store,branch")
7050
                        (const_string "unchanged")
7051
                    (eq_attr "type" "arith")
7052
                        (if_then_else (match_operand:SI 0 "" "")
7053
                                      (const_string "set")
7054
                                      (const_string "clobber"))]
7055
                   (const_string "clobber")))
7056
 
7057
(define_insn ""
7058
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,r,m")
7059
        (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "r,m,r"))]
7060
  ""
7061
  "@@
7062
   move %0,%1
7063
   load %0,%1
7064
   store %0,%1"
7065
  [(set_attr "type" "arith,load,store")])
7066
@end smallexample
7067
 
7068
Note that we assume in the above example that arithmetic operations
7069
performed on quantities smaller than a machine word clobber the condition
7070
code since they will set the condition code to a value corresponding to the
7071
full-word result.
7072
 
7073
@end ifset
7074
@ifset INTERNALS
7075
@node Insn Lengths
7076
@subsection Computing the Length of an Insn
7077
@cindex insn lengths, computing
7078
@cindex computing the length of an insn
7079
 
7080
For many machines, multiple types of branch instructions are provided, each
7081
for different length branch displacements.  In most cases, the assembler
7082
will choose the correct instruction to use.  However, when the assembler
7083
cannot do so, GCC can when a special attribute, the @code{length}
7084
attribute, is defined.  This attribute must be defined to have numeric
7085
values by specifying a null string in its @code{define_attr}.
7086
 
7087
In the case of the @code{length} attribute, two additional forms of
7088
arithmetic terms are allowed in test expressions:
7089
 
7090
@table @code
7091
@cindex @code{match_dup} and attributes
7092
@item (match_dup @var{n})
7093
This refers to the address of operand @var{n} of the current insn, which
7094
must be a @code{label_ref}.
7095
 
7096
@cindex @code{pc} and attributes
7097
@item (pc)
7098
This refers to the address of the @emph{current} insn.  It might have
7099
been more consistent with other usage to make this the address of the
7100
@emph{next} insn but this would be confusing because the length of the
7101
current insn is to be computed.
7102
@end table
7103
 
7104
@cindex @code{addr_vec}, length of
7105
@cindex @code{addr_diff_vec}, length of
7106
For normal insns, the length will be determined by value of the
7107
@code{length} attribute.  In the case of @code{addr_vec} and
7108
@code{addr_diff_vec} insn patterns, the length is computed as
7109
the number of vectors multiplied by the size of each vector.
7110
 
7111
Lengths are measured in addressable storage units (bytes).
7112
 
7113
The following macros can be used to refine the length computation:
7114
 
7115
@table @code
7116
@findex ADJUST_INSN_LENGTH
7117
@item ADJUST_INSN_LENGTH (@var{insn}, @var{length})
7118
If defined, modifies the length assigned to instruction @var{insn} as a
7119
function of the context in which it is used.  @var{length} is an lvalue
7120
that contains the initially computed length of the insn and should be
7121
updated with the correct length of the insn.
7122
 
7123
This macro will normally not be required.  A case in which it is
7124
required is the ROMP@.  On this machine, the size of an @code{addr_vec}
7125
insn must be increased by two to compensate for the fact that alignment
7126
may be required.
7127
@end table
7128
 
7129
@findex get_attr_length
7130
The routine that returns @code{get_attr_length} (the value of the
7131
@code{length} attribute) can be used by the output routine to
7132
determine the form of the branch instruction to be written, as the
7133
example below illustrates.
7134
 
7135
As an example of the specification of variable-length branches, consider
7136
the IBM 360.  If we adopt the convention that a register will be set to
7137
the starting address of a function, we can jump to labels within 4k of
7138
the start using a four-byte instruction.  Otherwise, we need a six-byte
7139
sequence to load the address from memory and then branch to it.
7140
 
7141
On such a machine, a pattern for a branch instruction might be specified
7142
as follows:
7143
 
7144
@smallexample
7145
(define_insn "jump"
7146
  [(set (pc)
7147
        (label_ref (match_operand 0 "" "")))]
7148
  ""
7149
@{
7150
   return (get_attr_length (insn) == 4
7151
           ? "b %l0" : "l r15,=a(%l0); br r15");
7152
@}
7153
  [(set (attr "length")
7154
        (if_then_else (lt (match_dup 0) (const_int 4096))
7155
                      (const_int 4)
7156
                      (const_int 6)))])
7157
@end smallexample
7158
 
7159
@end ifset
7160
@ifset INTERNALS
7161
@node Constant Attributes
7162
@subsection Constant Attributes
7163
@cindex constant attributes
7164
 
7165
A special form of @code{define_attr}, where the expression for the
7166
default value is a @code{const} expression, indicates an attribute that
7167
is constant for a given run of the compiler.  Constant attributes may be
7168
used to specify which variety of processor is used.  For example,
7169
 
7170
@smallexample
7171
(define_attr "cpu" "m88100,m88110,m88000"
7172
 (const
7173
  (cond [(symbol_ref "TARGET_88100") (const_string "m88100")
7174
         (symbol_ref "TARGET_88110") (const_string "m88110")]
7175
        (const_string "m88000"))))
7176
 
7177
(define_attr "memory" "fast,slow"
7178
 (const
7179
  (if_then_else (symbol_ref "TARGET_FAST_MEM")
7180
                (const_string "fast")
7181
                (const_string "slow"))))
7182
@end smallexample
7183
 
7184
The routine generated for constant attributes has no parameters as it
7185
does not depend on any particular insn.  RTL expressions used to define
7186
the value of a constant attribute may use the @code{symbol_ref} form,
7187
but may not use either the @code{match_operand} form or @code{eq_attr}
7188
forms involving insn attributes.
7189
 
7190
@end ifset
7191
@ifset INTERNALS
7192
@node Delay Slots
7193
@subsection Delay Slot Scheduling
7194
@cindex delay slots, defining
7195
 
7196
The insn attribute mechanism can be used to specify the requirements for
7197
delay slots, if any, on a target machine.  An instruction is said to
7198
require a @dfn{delay slot} if some instructions that are physically
7199
after the instruction are executed as if they were located before it.
7200
Classic examples are branch and call instructions, which often execute
7201
the following instruction before the branch or call is performed.
7202
 
7203
On some machines, conditional branch instructions can optionally
7204
@dfn{annul} instructions in the delay slot.  This means that the
7205
instruction will not be executed for certain branch outcomes.  Both
7206
instructions that annul if the branch is true and instructions that
7207
annul if the branch is false are supported.
7208
 
7209
Delay slot scheduling differs from instruction scheduling in that
7210
determining whether an instruction needs a delay slot is dependent only
7211
on the type of instruction being generated, not on data flow between the
7212
instructions.  See the next section for a discussion of data-dependent
7213
instruction scheduling.
7214
 
7215
@findex define_delay
7216
The requirement of an insn needing one or more delay slots is indicated
7217
via the @code{define_delay} expression.  It has the following form:
7218
 
7219
@smallexample
7220
(define_delay @var{test}
7221
              [@var{delay-1} @var{annul-true-1} @var{annul-false-1}
7222
               @var{delay-2} @var{annul-true-2} @var{annul-false-2}
7223
               @dots{}])
7224
@end smallexample
7225
 
7226
@var{test} is an attribute test that indicates whether this
7227
@code{define_delay} applies to a particular insn.  If so, the number of
7228
required delay slots is determined by the length of the vector specified
7229
as the second argument.  An insn placed in delay slot @var{n} must
7230
satisfy attribute test @var{delay-n}.  @var{annul-true-n} is an
7231
attribute test that specifies which insns may be annulled if the branch
7232
is true.  Similarly, @var{annul-false-n} specifies which insns in the
7233
delay slot may be annulled if the branch is false.  If annulling is not
7234
supported for that delay slot, @code{(nil)} should be coded.
7235
 
7236
For example, in the common case where branch and call insns require
7237
a single delay slot, which may contain any insn other than a branch or
7238
call, the following would be placed in the @file{md} file:
7239
 
7240
@smallexample
7241
(define_delay (eq_attr "type" "branch,call")
7242
              [(eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") (nil) (nil)])
7243
@end smallexample
7244
 
7245
Multiple @code{define_delay} expressions may be specified.  In this
7246
case, each such expression specifies different delay slot requirements
7247
and there must be no insn for which tests in two @code{define_delay}
7248
expressions are both true.
7249
 
7250
For example, if we have a machine that requires one delay slot for branches
7251
but two for calls,  no delay slot can contain a branch or call insn,
7252
and any valid insn in the delay slot for the branch can be annulled if the
7253
branch is true, we might represent this as follows:
7254
 
7255
@smallexample
7256
(define_delay (eq_attr "type" "branch")
7257
   [(eq_attr "type" "!branch,call")
7258
    (eq_attr "type" "!branch,call")
7259
    (nil)])
7260
 
7261
(define_delay (eq_attr "type" "call")
7262
              [(eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") (nil) (nil)
7263
               (eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") (nil) (nil)])
7264
@end smallexample
7265
@c the above is *still* too long.  --mew 4feb93
7266
 
7267
@end ifset
7268
@ifset INTERNALS
7269
@node Processor pipeline description
7270
@subsection Specifying processor pipeline description
7271
@cindex processor pipeline description
7272
@cindex processor functional units
7273
@cindex instruction latency time
7274
@cindex interlock delays
7275
@cindex data dependence delays
7276
@cindex reservation delays
7277
@cindex pipeline hazard recognizer
7278
@cindex automaton based pipeline description
7279
@cindex regular expressions
7280
@cindex deterministic finite state automaton
7281
@cindex automaton based scheduler
7282
@cindex RISC
7283
@cindex VLIW
7284
 
7285
To achieve better performance, most modern processors
7286
(super-pipelined, superscalar @acronym{RISC}, and @acronym{VLIW}
7287
processors) have many @dfn{functional units} on which several
7288
instructions can be executed simultaneously.  An instruction starts
7289
execution if its issue conditions are satisfied.  If not, the
7290
instruction is stalled until its conditions are satisfied.  Such
7291
@dfn{interlock (pipeline) delay} causes interruption of the fetching
7292
of successor instructions (or demands nop instructions, e.g.@: for some
7293
MIPS processors).
7294
 
7295
There are two major kinds of interlock delays in modern processors.
7296
The first one is a data dependence delay determining @dfn{instruction
7297
latency time}.  The instruction execution is not started until all
7298
source data have been evaluated by prior instructions (there are more
7299
complex cases when the instruction execution starts even when the data
7300
are not available but will be ready in given time after the
7301
instruction execution start).  Taking the data dependence delays into
7302
account is simple.  The data dependence (true, output, and
7303
anti-dependence) delay between two instructions is given by a
7304
constant.  In most cases this approach is adequate.  The second kind
7305
of interlock delays is a reservation delay.  The reservation delay
7306
means that two instructions under execution will be in need of shared
7307
processors resources, i.e.@: buses, internal registers, and/or
7308
functional units, which are reserved for some time.  Taking this kind
7309
of delay into account is complex especially for modern @acronym{RISC}
7310
processors.
7311
 
7312
The task of exploiting more processor parallelism is solved by an
7313
instruction scheduler.  For a better solution to this problem, the
7314
instruction scheduler has to have an adequate description of the
7315
processor parallelism (or @dfn{pipeline description}).  GCC
7316
machine descriptions describe processor parallelism and functional
7317
unit reservations for groups of instructions with the aid of
7318
@dfn{regular expressions}.
7319
 
7320
The GCC instruction scheduler uses a @dfn{pipeline hazard recognizer} to
7321
figure out the possibility of the instruction issue by the processor
7322
on a given simulated processor cycle.  The pipeline hazard recognizer is
7323
automatically generated from the processor pipeline description.  The
7324
pipeline hazard recognizer generated from the machine description
7325
is based on a deterministic finite state automaton (@acronym{DFA}):
7326
the instruction issue is possible if there is a transition from one
7327
automaton state to another one.  This algorithm is very fast, and
7328
furthermore, its speed is not dependent on processor
7329
complexity@footnote{However, the size of the automaton depends on
7330
processor complexity.  To limit this effect, machine descriptions
7331
can split orthogonal parts of the machine description among several
7332
automata: but then, since each of these must be stepped independently,
7333
this does cause a small decrease in the algorithm's performance.}.
7334
 
7335
@cindex automaton based pipeline description
7336
The rest of this section describes the directives that constitute
7337
an automaton-based processor pipeline description.  The order of
7338
these constructions within the machine description file is not
7339
important.
7340
 
7341
@findex define_automaton
7342
@cindex pipeline hazard recognizer
7343
The following optional construction describes names of automata
7344
generated and used for the pipeline hazards recognition.  Sometimes
7345
the generated finite state automaton used by the pipeline hazard
7346
recognizer is large.  If we use more than one automaton and bind functional
7347
units to the automata, the total size of the automata is usually
7348
less than the size of the single automaton.  If there is no one such
7349
construction, only one finite state automaton is generated.
7350
 
7351
@smallexample
7352
(define_automaton @var{automata-names})
7353
@end smallexample
7354
 
7355
@var{automata-names} is a string giving names of the automata.  The
7356
names are separated by commas.  All the automata should have unique names.
7357
The automaton name is used in the constructions @code{define_cpu_unit} and
7358
@code{define_query_cpu_unit}.
7359
 
7360
@findex define_cpu_unit
7361
@cindex processor functional units
7362
Each processor functional unit used in the description of instruction
7363
reservations should be described by the following construction.
7364
 
7365
@smallexample
7366
(define_cpu_unit @var{unit-names} [@var{automaton-name}])
7367
@end smallexample
7368
 
7369
@var{unit-names} is a string giving the names of the functional units
7370
separated by commas.  Don't use name @samp{nothing}, it is reserved
7371
for other goals.
7372
 
7373
@var{automaton-name} is a string giving the name of the automaton with
7374
which the unit is bound.  The automaton should be described in
7375
construction @code{define_automaton}.  You should give
7376
@dfn{automaton-name}, if there is a defined automaton.
7377
 
7378
The assignment of units to automata are constrained by the uses of the
7379
units in insn reservations.  The most important constraint is: if a
7380
unit reservation is present on a particular cycle of an alternative
7381
for an insn reservation, then some unit from the same automaton must
7382
be present on the same cycle for the other alternatives of the insn
7383
reservation.  The rest of the constraints are mentioned in the
7384
description of the subsequent constructions.
7385
 
7386
@findex define_query_cpu_unit
7387
@cindex querying function unit reservations
7388
The following construction describes CPU functional units analogously
7389
to @code{define_cpu_unit}.  The reservation of such units can be
7390
queried for an automaton state.  The instruction scheduler never
7391
queries reservation of functional units for given automaton state.  So
7392
as a rule, you don't need this construction.  This construction could
7393
be used for future code generation goals (e.g.@: to generate
7394
@acronym{VLIW} insn templates).
7395
 
7396
@smallexample
7397
(define_query_cpu_unit @var{unit-names} [@var{automaton-name}])
7398
@end smallexample
7399
 
7400
@var{unit-names} is a string giving names of the functional units
7401
separated by commas.
7402
 
7403
@var{automaton-name} is a string giving the name of the automaton with
7404
which the unit is bound.
7405
 
7406
@findex define_insn_reservation
7407
@cindex instruction latency time
7408
@cindex regular expressions
7409
@cindex data bypass
7410
The following construction is the major one to describe pipeline
7411
characteristics of an instruction.
7412
 
7413
@smallexample
7414
(define_insn_reservation @var{insn-name} @var{default_latency}
7415
                         @var{condition} @var{regexp})
7416
@end smallexample
7417
 
7418
@var{default_latency} is a number giving latency time of the
7419
instruction.  There is an important difference between the old
7420
description and the automaton based pipeline description.  The latency
7421
time is used for all dependencies when we use the old description.  In
7422
the automaton based pipeline description, the given latency time is only
7423
used for true dependencies.  The cost of anti-dependencies is always
7424
zero and the cost of output dependencies is the difference between
7425
latency times of the producing and consuming insns (if the difference
7426
is negative, the cost is considered to be zero).  You can always
7427
change the default costs for any description by using the target hook
7428
@code{TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST} (@pxref{Scheduling}).
7429
 
7430
@var{insn-name} is a string giving the internal name of the insn.  The
7431
internal names are used in constructions @code{define_bypass} and in
7432
the automaton description file generated for debugging.  The internal
7433
name has nothing in common with the names in @code{define_insn}.  It is a
7434
good practice to use insn classes described in the processor manual.
7435
 
7436
@var{condition} defines what RTL insns are described by this
7437
construction.  You should remember that you will be in trouble if
7438
@var{condition} for two or more different
7439
@code{define_insn_reservation} constructions is TRUE for an insn.  In
7440
this case what reservation will be used for the insn is not defined.
7441
Such cases are not checked during generation of the pipeline hazards
7442
recognizer because in general recognizing that two conditions may have
7443
the same value is quite difficult (especially if the conditions
7444
contain @code{symbol_ref}).  It is also not checked during the
7445
pipeline hazard recognizer work because it would slow down the
7446
recognizer considerably.
7447
 
7448
@var{regexp} is a string describing the reservation of the cpu's functional
7449
units by the instruction.  The reservations are described by a regular
7450
expression according to the following syntax:
7451
 
7452
@smallexample
7453
       regexp = regexp "," oneof
7454
              | oneof
7455
 
7456
       oneof = oneof "|" allof
7457
             | allof
7458
 
7459
       allof = allof "+" repeat
7460
             | repeat
7461
 
7462
       repeat = element "*" number
7463
              | element
7464
 
7465
       element = cpu_function_unit_name
7466
               | reservation_name
7467
               | result_name
7468
               | "nothing"
7469
               | "(" regexp ")"
7470
@end smallexample
7471
 
7472
@itemize @bullet
7473
@item
7474
@samp{,} is used for describing the start of the next cycle in
7475
the reservation.
7476
 
7477
@item
7478
@samp{|} is used for describing a reservation described by the first
7479
regular expression @strong{or} a reservation described by the second
7480
regular expression @strong{or} etc.
7481
 
7482
@item
7483
@samp{+} is used for describing a reservation described by the first
7484
regular expression @strong{and} a reservation described by the
7485
second regular expression @strong{and} etc.
7486
 
7487
@item
7488
@samp{*} is used for convenience and simply means a sequence in which
7489
the regular expression are repeated @var{number} times with cycle
7490
advancing (see @samp{,}).
7491
 
7492
@item
7493
@samp{cpu_function_unit_name} denotes reservation of the named
7494
functional unit.
7495
 
7496
@item
7497
@samp{reservation_name} --- see description of construction
7498
@samp{define_reservation}.
7499
 
7500
@item
7501
@samp{nothing} denotes no unit reservations.
7502
@end itemize
7503
 
7504
@findex define_reservation
7505
Sometimes unit reservations for different insns contain common parts.
7506
In such case, you can simplify the pipeline description by describing
7507
the common part by the following construction
7508
 
7509
@smallexample
7510
(define_reservation @var{reservation-name} @var{regexp})
7511
@end smallexample
7512
 
7513
@var{reservation-name} is a string giving name of @var{regexp}.
7514
Functional unit names and reservation names are in the same name
7515
space.  So the reservation names should be different from the
7516
functional unit names and can not be the reserved name @samp{nothing}.
7517
 
7518
@findex define_bypass
7519
@cindex instruction latency time
7520
@cindex data bypass
7521
The following construction is used to describe exceptions in the
7522
latency time for given instruction pair.  This is so called bypasses.
7523
 
7524
@smallexample
7525
(define_bypass @var{number} @var{out_insn_names} @var{in_insn_names}
7526
               [@var{guard}])
7527
@end smallexample
7528
 
7529
@var{number} defines when the result generated by the instructions
7530
given in string @var{out_insn_names} will be ready for the
7531
instructions given in string @var{in_insn_names}.  The instructions in
7532
the string are separated by commas.
7533
 
7534
@var{guard} is an optional string giving the name of a C function which
7535
defines an additional guard for the bypass.  The function will get the
7536
two insns as parameters.  If the function returns zero the bypass will
7537
be ignored for this case.  The additional guard is necessary to
7538
recognize complicated bypasses, e.g.@: when the consumer is only an address
7539
of insn @samp{store} (not a stored value).
7540
 
7541
If there are more one bypass with the same output and input insns, the
7542
chosen bypass is the first bypass with a guard in description whose
7543
guard function returns nonzero.  If there is no such bypass, then
7544
bypass without the guard function is chosen.
7545
 
7546
@findex exclusion_set
7547
@findex presence_set
7548
@findex final_presence_set
7549
@findex absence_set
7550
@findex final_absence_set
7551
@cindex VLIW
7552
@cindex RISC
7553
The following five constructions are usually used to describe
7554
@acronym{VLIW} processors, or more precisely, to describe a placement
7555
of small instructions into @acronym{VLIW} instruction slots.  They
7556
can be used for @acronym{RISC} processors, too.
7557
 
7558
@smallexample
7559
(exclusion_set @var{unit-names} @var{unit-names})
7560
(presence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns})
7561
(final_presence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns})
7562
(absence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns})
7563
(final_absence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns})
7564
@end smallexample
7565
 
7566
@var{unit-names} is a string giving names of functional units
7567
separated by commas.
7568
 
7569
@var{patterns} is a string giving patterns of functional units
7570
separated by comma.  Currently pattern is one unit or units
7571
separated by white-spaces.
7572
 
7573
The first construction (@samp{exclusion_set}) means that each
7574
functional unit in the first string can not be reserved simultaneously
7575
with a unit whose name is in the second string and vice versa.  For
7576
example, the construction is useful for describing processors
7577
(e.g.@: some SPARC processors) with a fully pipelined floating point
7578
functional unit which can execute simultaneously only single floating
7579
point insns or only double floating point insns.
7580
 
7581
The second construction (@samp{presence_set}) means that each
7582
functional unit in the first string can not be reserved unless at
7583
least one of pattern of units whose names are in the second string is
7584
reserved.  This is an asymmetric relation.  For example, it is useful
7585
for description that @acronym{VLIW} @samp{slot1} is reserved after
7586
@samp{slot0} reservation.  We could describe it by the following
7587
construction
7588
 
7589
@smallexample
7590
(presence_set "slot1" "slot0")
7591
@end smallexample
7592
 
7593
Or @samp{slot1} is reserved only after @samp{slot0} and unit @samp{b0}
7594
reservation.  In this case we could write
7595
 
7596
@smallexample
7597
(presence_set "slot1" "slot0 b0")
7598
@end smallexample
7599
 
7600
The third construction (@samp{final_presence_set}) is analogous to
7601
@samp{presence_set}.  The difference between them is when checking is
7602
done.  When an instruction is issued in given automaton state
7603
reflecting all current and planned unit reservations, the automaton
7604
state is changed.  The first state is a source state, the second one
7605
is a result state.  Checking for @samp{presence_set} is done on the
7606
source state reservation, checking for @samp{final_presence_set} is
7607
done on the result reservation.  This construction is useful to
7608
describe a reservation which is actually two subsequent reservations.
7609
For example, if we use
7610
 
7611
@smallexample
7612
(presence_set "slot1" "slot0")
7613
@end smallexample
7614
 
7615
the following insn will be never issued (because @samp{slot1} requires
7616
@samp{slot0} which is absent in the source state).
7617
 
7618
@smallexample
7619
(define_reservation "insn_and_nop" "slot0 + slot1")
7620
@end smallexample
7621
 
7622
but it can be issued if we use analogous @samp{final_presence_set}.
7623
 
7624
The forth construction (@samp{absence_set}) means that each functional
7625
unit in the first string can be reserved only if each pattern of units
7626
whose names are in the second string is not reserved.  This is an
7627
asymmetric relation (actually @samp{exclusion_set} is analogous to
7628
this one but it is symmetric).  For example it might be useful in a
7629
@acronym{VLIW} description to say that @samp{slot0} cannot be reserved
7630
after either @samp{slot1} or @samp{slot2} have been reserved.  This
7631
can be described as:
7632
 
7633
@smallexample
7634
(absence_set "slot0" "slot1, slot2")
7635
@end smallexample
7636
 
7637
Or @samp{slot2} can not be reserved if @samp{slot0} and unit @samp{b0}
7638
are reserved or @samp{slot1} and unit @samp{b1} are reserved.  In
7639
this case we could write
7640
 
7641
@smallexample
7642
(absence_set "slot2" "slot0 b0, slot1 b1")
7643
@end smallexample
7644
 
7645
All functional units mentioned in a set should belong to the same
7646
automaton.
7647
 
7648
The last construction (@samp{final_absence_set}) is analogous to
7649
@samp{absence_set} but checking is done on the result (state)
7650
reservation.  See comments for @samp{final_presence_set}.
7651
 
7652
@findex automata_option
7653
@cindex deterministic finite state automaton
7654
@cindex nondeterministic finite state automaton
7655
@cindex finite state automaton minimization
7656
You can control the generator of the pipeline hazard recognizer with
7657
the following construction.
7658
 
7659
@smallexample
7660
(automata_option @var{options})
7661
@end smallexample
7662
 
7663
@var{options} is a string giving options which affect the generated
7664
code.  Currently there are the following options:
7665
 
7666
@itemize @bullet
7667
@item
7668
@dfn{no-minimization} makes no minimization of the automaton.  This is
7669
only worth to do when we are debugging the description and need to
7670
look more accurately at reservations of states.
7671
 
7672
@item
7673
@dfn{time} means printing time statistics about the generation of
7674
automata.
7675
 
7676
@item
7677
@dfn{stats} means printing statistics about the generated automata
7678
such as the number of DFA states, NDFA states and arcs.
7679
 
7680
@item
7681
@dfn{v} means a generation of the file describing the result automata.
7682
The file has suffix @samp{.dfa} and can be used for the description
7683
verification and debugging.
7684
 
7685
@item
7686
@dfn{w} means a generation of warning instead of error for
7687
non-critical errors.
7688
 
7689
@item
7690
@dfn{ndfa} makes nondeterministic finite state automata.  This affects
7691
the treatment of operator @samp{|} in the regular expressions.  The
7692
usual treatment of the operator is to try the first alternative and,
7693
if the reservation is not possible, the second alternative.  The
7694
nondeterministic treatment means trying all alternatives, some of them
7695
may be rejected by reservations in the subsequent insns.
7696
 
7697
@item
7698
@dfn{progress} means output of a progress bar showing how many states
7699
were generated so far for automaton being processed.  This is useful
7700
during debugging a @acronym{DFA} description.  If you see too many
7701
generated states, you could interrupt the generator of the pipeline
7702
hazard recognizer and try to figure out a reason for generation of the
7703
huge automaton.
7704
@end itemize
7705
 
7706
As an example, consider a superscalar @acronym{RISC} machine which can
7707
issue three insns (two integer insns and one floating point insn) on
7708
the cycle but can finish only two insns.  To describe this, we define
7709
the following functional units.
7710
 
7711
@smallexample
7712
(define_cpu_unit "i0_pipeline, i1_pipeline, f_pipeline")
7713
(define_cpu_unit "port0, port1")
7714
@end smallexample
7715
 
7716
All simple integer insns can be executed in any integer pipeline and
7717
their result is ready in two cycles.  The simple integer insns are
7718
issued into the first pipeline unless it is reserved, otherwise they
7719
are issued into the second pipeline.  Integer division and
7720
multiplication insns can be executed only in the second integer
7721
pipeline and their results are ready correspondingly in 8 and 4
7722
cycles.  The integer division is not pipelined, i.e.@: the subsequent
7723
integer division insn can not be issued until the current division
7724
insn finished.  Floating point insns are fully pipelined and their
7725
results are ready in 3 cycles.  Where the result of a floating point
7726
insn is used by an integer insn, an additional delay of one cycle is
7727
incurred.  To describe all of this we could specify
7728
 
7729
@smallexample
7730
(define_cpu_unit "div")
7731
 
7732
(define_insn_reservation "simple" 2 (eq_attr "type" "int")
7733
                         "(i0_pipeline | i1_pipeline), (port0 | port1)")
7734
 
7735
(define_insn_reservation "mult" 4 (eq_attr "type" "mult")
7736
                         "i1_pipeline, nothing*2, (port0 | port1)")
7737
 
7738
(define_insn_reservation "div" 8 (eq_attr "type" "div")
7739
                         "i1_pipeline, div*7, div + (port0 | port1)")
7740
 
7741
(define_insn_reservation "float" 3 (eq_attr "type" "float")
7742
                         "f_pipeline, nothing, (port0 | port1))
7743
 
7744
(define_bypass 4 "float" "simple,mult,div")
7745
@end smallexample
7746
 
7747
To simplify the description we could describe the following reservation
7748
 
7749
@smallexample
7750
(define_reservation "finish" "port0|port1")
7751
@end smallexample
7752
 
7753
and use it in all @code{define_insn_reservation} as in the following
7754
construction
7755
 
7756
@smallexample
7757
(define_insn_reservation "simple" 2 (eq_attr "type" "int")
7758
                         "(i0_pipeline | i1_pipeline), finish")
7759
@end smallexample
7760
 
7761
 
7762
@end ifset
7763
@ifset INTERNALS
7764
@node Conditional Execution
7765
@section Conditional Execution
7766
@cindex conditional execution
7767
@cindex predication
7768
 
7769
A number of architectures provide for some form of conditional
7770
execution, or predication.  The hallmark of this feature is the
7771
ability to nullify most of the instructions in the instruction set.
7772
When the instruction set is large and not entirely symmetric, it
7773
can be quite tedious to describe these forms directly in the
7774
@file{.md} file.  An alternative is the @code{define_cond_exec} template.
7775
 
7776
@findex define_cond_exec
7777
@smallexample
7778
(define_cond_exec
7779
  [@var{predicate-pattern}]
7780
  "@var{condition}"
7781
  "@var{output-template}")
7782
@end smallexample
7783
 
7784
@var{predicate-pattern} is the condition that must be true for the
7785
insn to be executed at runtime and should match a relational operator.
7786
One can use @code{match_operator} to match several relational operators
7787
at once.  Any @code{match_operand} operands must have no more than one
7788
alternative.
7789
 
7790
@var{condition} is a C expression that must be true for the generated
7791
pattern to match.
7792
 
7793
@findex current_insn_predicate
7794
@var{output-template} is a string similar to the @code{define_insn}
7795
output template (@pxref{Output Template}), except that the @samp{*}
7796
and @samp{@@} special cases do not apply.  This is only useful if the
7797
assembly text for the predicate is a simple prefix to the main insn.
7798
In order to handle the general case, there is a global variable
7799
@code{current_insn_predicate} that will contain the entire predicate
7800
if the current insn is predicated, and will otherwise be @code{NULL}.
7801
 
7802
When @code{define_cond_exec} is used, an implicit reference to
7803
the @code{predicable} instruction attribute is made.
7804
@xref{Insn Attributes}.  This attribute must be boolean (i.e.@: have
7805
exactly two elements in its @var{list-of-values}).  Further, it must
7806
not be used with complex expressions.  That is, the default and all
7807
uses in the insns must be a simple constant, not dependent on the
7808
alternative or anything else.
7809
 
7810
For each @code{define_insn} for which the @code{predicable}
7811
attribute is true, a new @code{define_insn} pattern will be
7812
generated that matches a predicated version of the instruction.
7813
For example,
7814
 
7815
@smallexample
7816
(define_insn "addsi"
7817
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "r")
7818
        (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "r")
7819
                 (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "r")))]
7820
  "@var{test1}"
7821
  "add %2,%1,%0")
7822
 
7823
(define_cond_exec
7824
  [(ne (match_operand:CC 0 "register_operand" "c")
7825
       (const_int 0))]
7826
  "@var{test2}"
7827
  "(%0)")
7828
@end smallexample
7829
 
7830
@noindent
7831
generates a new pattern
7832
 
7833
@smallexample
7834
(define_insn ""
7835
  [(cond_exec
7836
     (ne (match_operand:CC 3 "register_operand" "c") (const_int 0))
7837
     (set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "r")
7838
          (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "r")
7839
                   (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "r"))))]
7840
  "(@var{test2}) && (@var{test1})"
7841
  "(%3) add %2,%1,%0")
7842
@end smallexample
7843
 
7844
@end ifset
7845
@ifset INTERNALS
7846
@node Constant Definitions
7847
@section Constant Definitions
7848
@cindex constant definitions
7849
@findex define_constants
7850
 
7851
Using literal constants inside instruction patterns reduces legibility and
7852
can be a maintenance problem.
7853
 
7854
To overcome this problem, you may use the @code{define_constants}
7855
expression.  It contains a vector of name-value pairs.  From that
7856
point on, wherever any of the names appears in the MD file, it is as
7857
if the corresponding value had been written instead.  You may use
7858
@code{define_constants} multiple times; each appearance adds more
7859
constants to the table.  It is an error to redefine a constant with
7860
a different value.
7861
 
7862
To come back to the a29k load multiple example, instead of
7863
 
7864
@smallexample
7865
(define_insn ""
7866
  [(match_parallel 0 "load_multiple_operation"
7867
     [(set (match_operand:SI 1 "gpc_reg_operand" "=r")
7868
           (match_operand:SI 2 "memory_operand" "m"))
7869
      (use (reg:SI 179))
7870
      (clobber (reg:SI 179))])]
7871
  ""
7872
  "loadm 0,0,%1,%2")
7873
@end smallexample
7874
 
7875
You could write:
7876
 
7877
@smallexample
7878
(define_constants [
7879
    (R_BP 177)
7880
    (R_FC 178)
7881
    (R_CR 179)
7882
    (R_Q  180)
7883
])
7884
 
7885
(define_insn ""
7886
  [(match_parallel 0 "load_multiple_operation"
7887
     [(set (match_operand:SI 1 "gpc_reg_operand" "=r")
7888
           (match_operand:SI 2 "memory_operand" "m"))
7889
      (use (reg:SI R_CR))
7890
      (clobber (reg:SI R_CR))])]
7891
  ""
7892
  "loadm 0,0,%1,%2")
7893
@end smallexample
7894
 
7895
The constants that are defined with a define_constant are also output
7896
in the insn-codes.h header file as #defines.
7897
@end ifset
7898
@ifset INTERNALS
7899
@node Iterators
7900
@section Iterators
7901
@cindex iterators in @file{.md} files
7902
 
7903
Ports often need to define similar patterns for more than one machine
7904
mode or for more than one rtx code.  GCC provides some simple iterator
7905
facilities to make this process easier.
7906
 
7907
@menu
7908
* Mode Iterators::         Generating variations of patterns for different modes.
7909
* Code Iterators::         Doing the same for codes.
7910
@end menu
7911
 
7912
@node Mode Iterators
7913
@subsection Mode Iterators
7914
@cindex mode iterators in @file{.md} files
7915
 
7916
Ports often need to define similar patterns for two or more different modes.
7917
For example:
7918
 
7919
@itemize @bullet
7920
@item
7921
If a processor has hardware support for both single and double
7922
floating-point arithmetic, the @code{SFmode} patterns tend to be
7923
very similar to the @code{DFmode} ones.
7924
 
7925
@item
7926
If a port uses @code{SImode} pointers in one configuration and
7927
@code{DImode} pointers in another, it will usually have very similar
7928
@code{SImode} and @code{DImode} patterns for manipulating pointers.
7929
@end itemize
7930
 
7931
Mode iterators allow several patterns to be instantiated from one
7932
@file{.md} file template.  They can be used with any type of
7933
rtx-based construct, such as a @code{define_insn},
7934
@code{define_split}, or @code{define_peephole2}.
7935
 
7936
@menu
7937
* Defining Mode Iterators:: Defining a new mode iterator.
7938
* Substitutions::           Combining mode iterators with substitutions
7939
* Examples::                Examples
7940
@end menu
7941
 
7942
@node Defining Mode Iterators
7943
@subsubsection Defining Mode Iterators
7944
@findex define_mode_iterator
7945
 
7946
The syntax for defining a mode iterator is:
7947
 
7948
@smallexample
7949
(define_mode_iterator @var{name} [(@var{mode1} "@var{cond1}") @dots{} (@var{moden} "@var{condn}")])
7950
@end smallexample
7951
 
7952
This allows subsequent @file{.md} file constructs to use the mode suffix
7953
@code{:@var{name}}.  Every construct that does so will be expanded
7954
@var{n} times, once with every use of @code{:@var{name}} replaced by
7955
@code{:@var{mode1}}, once with every use replaced by @code{:@var{mode2}},
7956
and so on.  In the expansion for a particular @var{modei}, every
7957
C condition will also require that @var{condi} be true.
7958
 
7959
For example:
7960
 
7961
@smallexample
7962
(define_mode_iterator P [(SI "Pmode == SImode") (DI "Pmode == DImode")])
7963
@end smallexample
7964
 
7965
defines a new mode suffix @code{:P}.  Every construct that uses
7966
@code{:P} will be expanded twice, once with every @code{:P} replaced
7967
by @code{:SI} and once with every @code{:P} replaced by @code{:DI}.
7968
The @code{:SI} version will only apply if @code{Pmode == SImode} and
7969
the @code{:DI} version will only apply if @code{Pmode == DImode}.
7970
 
7971
As with other @file{.md} conditions, an empty string is treated
7972
as ``always true''.  @code{(@var{mode} "")} can also be abbreviated
7973
to @code{@var{mode}}.  For example:
7974
 
7975
@smallexample
7976
(define_mode_iterator GPR [SI (DI "TARGET_64BIT")])
7977
@end smallexample
7978
 
7979
means that the @code{:DI} expansion only applies if @code{TARGET_64BIT}
7980
but that the @code{:SI} expansion has no such constraint.
7981
 
7982
Iterators are applied in the order they are defined.  This can be
7983
significant if two iterators are used in a construct that requires
7984
substitutions.  @xref{Substitutions}.
7985
 
7986
@node Substitutions
7987
@subsubsection Substitution in Mode Iterators
7988
@findex define_mode_attr
7989
 
7990
If an @file{.md} file construct uses mode iterators, each version of the
7991
construct will often need slightly different strings or modes.  For
7992
example:
7993
 
7994
@itemize @bullet
7995
@item
7996
When a @code{define_expand} defines several @code{add@var{m}3} patterns
7997
(@pxref{Standard Names}), each expander will need to use the
7998
appropriate mode name for @var{m}.
7999
 
8000
@item
8001
When a @code{define_insn} defines several instruction patterns,
8002
each instruction will often use a different assembler mnemonic.
8003
 
8004
@item
8005
When a @code{define_insn} requires operands with different modes,
8006
using an iterator for one of the operand modes usually requires a specific
8007
mode for the other operand(s).
8008
@end itemize
8009
 
8010
GCC supports such variations through a system of ``mode attributes''.
8011
There are two standard attributes: @code{mode}, which is the name of
8012
the mode in lower case, and @code{MODE}, which is the same thing in
8013
upper case.  You can define other attributes using:
8014
 
8015
@smallexample
8016
(define_mode_attr @var{name} [(@var{mode1} "@var{value1}") @dots{} (@var{moden} "@var{valuen}")])
8017
@end smallexample
8018
 
8019
where @var{name} is the name of the attribute and @var{valuei}
8020
is the value associated with @var{modei}.
8021
 
8022
When GCC replaces some @var{:iterator} with @var{:mode}, it will scan
8023
each string and mode in the pattern for sequences of the form
8024
@code{<@var{iterator}:@var{attr}>}, where @var{attr} is the name of a
8025
mode attribute.  If the attribute is defined for @var{mode}, the whole
8026
@code{<@dots{}>} sequence will be replaced by the appropriate attribute
8027
value.
8028
 
8029
For example, suppose an @file{.md} file has:
8030
 
8031
@smallexample
8032
(define_mode_iterator P [(SI "Pmode == SImode") (DI "Pmode == DImode")])
8033
(define_mode_attr load [(SI "lw") (DI "ld")])
8034
@end smallexample
8035
 
8036
If one of the patterns that uses @code{:P} contains the string
8037
@code{"<P:load>\t%0,%1"}, the @code{SI} version of that pattern
8038
will use @code{"lw\t%0,%1"} and the @code{DI} version will use
8039
@code{"ld\t%0,%1"}.
8040
 
8041
Here is an example of using an attribute for a mode:
8042
 
8043
@smallexample
8044
(define_mode_iterator LONG [SI DI])
8045
(define_mode_attr SHORT [(SI "HI") (DI "SI")])
8046
(define_insn @dots{}
8047
  (sign_extend:LONG (match_operand:<LONG:SHORT> @dots{})) @dots{})
8048
@end smallexample
8049
 
8050
The @code{@var{iterator}:} prefix may be omitted, in which case the
8051
substitution will be attempted for every iterator expansion.
8052
 
8053
@node Examples
8054
@subsubsection Mode Iterator Examples
8055
 
8056
Here is an example from the MIPS port.  It defines the following
8057
modes and attributes (among others):
8058
 
8059
@smallexample
8060
(define_mode_iterator GPR [SI (DI "TARGET_64BIT")])
8061
(define_mode_attr d [(SI "") (DI "d")])
8062
@end smallexample
8063
 
8064
and uses the following template to define both @code{subsi3}
8065
and @code{subdi3}:
8066
 
8067
@smallexample
8068
(define_insn "sub<mode>3"
8069
  [(set (match_operand:GPR 0 "register_operand" "=d")
8070
        (minus:GPR (match_operand:GPR 1 "register_operand" "d")
8071
                   (match_operand:GPR 2 "register_operand" "d")))]
8072
  ""
8073
  "<d>subu\t%0,%1,%2"
8074
  [(set_attr "type" "arith")
8075
   (set_attr "mode" "<MODE>")])
8076
@end smallexample
8077
 
8078
This is exactly equivalent to:
8079
 
8080
@smallexample
8081
(define_insn "subsi3"
8082
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "=d")
8083
        (minus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "d")
8084
                  (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "d")))]
8085
  ""
8086
  "subu\t%0,%1,%2"
8087
  [(set_attr "type" "arith")
8088
   (set_attr "mode" "SI")])
8089
 
8090
(define_insn "subdi3"
8091
  [(set (match_operand:DI 0 "register_operand" "=d")
8092
        (minus:DI (match_operand:DI 1 "register_operand" "d")
8093
                  (match_operand:DI 2 "register_operand" "d")))]
8094
  ""
8095
  "dsubu\t%0,%1,%2"
8096
  [(set_attr "type" "arith")
8097
   (set_attr "mode" "DI")])
8098
@end smallexample
8099
 
8100
@node Code Iterators
8101
@subsection Code Iterators
8102
@cindex code iterators in @file{.md} files
8103
@findex define_code_iterator
8104
@findex define_code_attr
8105
 
8106
Code iterators operate in a similar way to mode iterators.  @xref{Mode Iterators}.
8107
 
8108
The construct:
8109
 
8110
@smallexample
8111
(define_code_iterator @var{name} [(@var{code1} "@var{cond1}") @dots{} (@var{coden} "@var{condn}")])
8112
@end smallexample
8113
 
8114
defines a pseudo rtx code @var{name} that can be instantiated as
8115
@var{codei} if condition @var{condi} is true.  Each @var{codei}
8116
must have the same rtx format.  @xref{RTL Classes}.
8117
 
8118
As with mode iterators, each pattern that uses @var{name} will be
8119
expanded @var{n} times, once with all uses of @var{name} replaced by
8120
@var{code1}, once with all uses replaced by @var{code2}, and so on.
8121
@xref{Defining Mode Iterators}.
8122
 
8123
It is possible to define attributes for codes as well as for modes.
8124
There are two standard code attributes: @code{code}, the name of the
8125
code in lower case, and @code{CODE}, the name of the code in upper case.
8126
Other attributes are defined using:
8127
 
8128
@smallexample
8129
(define_code_attr @var{name} [(@var{code1} "@var{value1}") @dots{} (@var{coden} "@var{valuen}")])
8130
@end smallexample
8131
 
8132
Here's an example of code iterators in action, taken from the MIPS port:
8133
 
8134
@smallexample
8135
(define_code_iterator any_cond [unordered ordered unlt unge uneq ltgt unle ungt
8136
                                eq ne gt ge lt le gtu geu ltu leu])
8137
 
8138
(define_expand "b<code>"
8139
  [(set (pc)
8140
        (if_then_else (any_cond:CC (cc0)
8141
                                   (const_int 0))
8142
                      (label_ref (match_operand 0 ""))
8143
                      (pc)))]
8144
  ""
8145
@{
8146
  gen_conditional_branch (operands, <CODE>);
8147
  DONE;
8148
@})
8149
@end smallexample
8150
 
8151
This is equivalent to:
8152
 
8153
@smallexample
8154
(define_expand "bunordered"
8155
  [(set (pc)
8156
        (if_then_else (unordered:CC (cc0)
8157
                                    (const_int 0))
8158
                      (label_ref (match_operand 0 ""))
8159
                      (pc)))]
8160
  ""
8161
@{
8162
  gen_conditional_branch (operands, UNORDERED);
8163
  DONE;
8164
@})
8165
 
8166
(define_expand "bordered"
8167
  [(set (pc)
8168
        (if_then_else (ordered:CC (cc0)
8169
                                  (const_int 0))
8170
                      (label_ref (match_operand 0 ""))
8171
                      (pc)))]
8172
  ""
8173
@{
8174
  gen_conditional_branch (operands, ORDERED);
8175
  DONE;
8176
@})
8177
 
8178
@dots{}
8179
@end smallexample
8180
 
8181
@end ifset

powered by: WebSVN 2.1.0

© copyright 1999-2024 OpenCores.org, equivalent to Oliscience, all rights reserved. OpenCores®, registered trademark.